Safety Operative Instructions

DOCUMENTO LC
N.
No job is so important than it cannot be done safely IDL-105-004 B
DOCUMENT NO.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
DATE
0 19/06/02 PAGE
1/201
TITOLO
TITLE
SAFETY OPERATIVE
INSTRUCTIONS
0 19/06/02 Issue SPP QSA PRE

REV. DATA DESCRIZIONE PREPARATO DA CONTROLLATO DA APPROVATO DA
DATE DESCRIPTION PREPARED BY CHECKED BY APPROVED BY
Questo documento è di proprietà della BONATTI S.p.A. La Società si riserva tutti i diritti. Nessuna riproduzione totale o parziale è permessa
senza autorizzazione scritta della Direzione.
This document is property of BONATTI S.p.A. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or utilized in any form or by any
means, without permission in writing from the executive management.
MOD-405-01 F REV.0
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
INSTRUCTIONS DOCUMENT NO. IDL-105-004 B
REV. DATA FOGLIO
No job is so important than it cannot be done safely
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
INDEX
1. PART 1 - ADMINISTRATION 13
1.1 BONATTI ALCOHOL AND DRUGS POLICY 13
1.2 BONATTI SAFETY POLICY 14

1.2.1 Safety Policy Implementation 15
1.2.1.1 Compliance with Construction and Project Requirements 15
1.2.1.2 Operating Standards and Instructions 15
1.2.1.3 Personal Protection 15
1.2.1.4 Inspection 15
1.2.1.5 Education and Training 15
1.2.1.6 Motivation and Recognition 15
1.2.1.7 Job Placement 15
1.2.1.8 Response to Accidental Occurrences 16
1.2.1.9 Traffic Safety 16
1.2.1.10 Accountability 16
1.2.1.11 Compliance Reviews 16
1.2.1.12 Standards and Instructions 16
1.2.1.13 Written Program 16
1.2.1.14 Hazard Identification Plan 17
1.2.1.15 Safety Discussion 17
1.2.2 Disciplinary Code 18
1.3 BONATTI SAFETY SERVICES 20

1.3.1 Safety Programme 20
1.4 ACCIDENT INVESTIGATION, ANALYSIS AND REPORTING 21

1.4.1 Definitions and Abbreviations 21
1.4.2 Reports Required by Bonatti Head Office 22
1.4.3 Accident Investigation 23
1.4.3.1 Responsibilities for Investigation 23
1.4.4 Cases to be Investigated 23
1.4.5 Accident Investigation Guidelines 24
1.4.6 Accident Analysis 24
1.4.6.1 Classification 24
1.5 Responsibility for Safety 26

1.5.1 Senior Management 26
1.5.2 Bonatti Site or Project Manager 26
1.5.3 Construction Manager/Superintendent 27
1.5.4 Supervisor 28
1.5.5 Foreman 28
1.5.6 Work er 28
1.5.7 Toolbox Meeting 30
1.5.8 Inspections and Site Safety Tours 30
1.5.8.1 Purpose 30
1.5.8.2 Safety Inspection Program 30
1.5.8.3 Routine Inspections 31
1.5.8.4 Routine (fixed time) Inspections 31
1.6 EMERGENCY PROCEDURES 32

1.6.1 Responsibilities 32
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
1.6.2 Instructions 32
1.6.3 Action to be taken 33
1.6.4 Emergency Assembly Areas/Muster Points 34
1.6.5 Site Alarms 34
1.6.6 Contact After Office Hours 34
1.6.7 Help in an Emergency 34
1.7 SAFETY TRAINING 35

1.7.1 Safety Training for Supervisors 35
1.7.2 Safety Training for Workmen 35
1.7.2.1 Integrated Practices 35
1.7.2.2 Specialized Training 35
1.7.2.3 Use of Persuasion 36
1.7.2.4 Course Requirements 36
1.7.3 Scope of Training 36
1.7.3.1 Safety Training Topics For Supervisors 37
1.7.3.2 Induction Safety Topics For Workmen 38
1.8 SITE PLANNING AND HOUSEKEEPING 39

1.8.1 Initial Planning 39
1.8.1.1 Hazard Identification Plan 39
1.8.1.2 Safety Programme 42
1.8.1.3 Transportation 42
1.8.1.4 Lifting Equipment 42
1.8.1.5 Demolition 43
1.8.1.6 Excavations 43
1.8.1.7 Scaffolding 43
1.8.2 Site Layout 43
1.8.2.1 Site Accommodation 43
1.8.2.2 Adequate Access Roads 43
1.8.2.3 Project Sign 43
1.8.2.4 Parking Facilities 43
1.8.2.5 Drainage 44
1.8.2.6 Vehicle / Heavy Equipment Paths On Site Vs Pedestrian Paths 44
1.8.2.7 Sand 44
1.8.2.8 Fire Prevention 44
1.8.2.9 Site Illumination 44
1.8.3 Storage Areas 44
1.8.4 Welfare Facilities 44
1.8.5 Good Housekeeping 45
1.8.6 Construction Sites and Materials Storage Yards 45
1.9 FIRST AID 46

1.9.1 Provision of First Aid Facilities 46
1.9.2 First Aid Attendants 46
1.9.3 First Aid Facilities At Work Site 47
1.10 PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT 48

1.10.1 Head Protection 48
1.10.2 Eye and Face Protection 48
1.10.2.1 Eye Protection from Impact 49
1.10.2.2 Eye Protection from Radiant Energies 49
1.10.2.3 Face Protection 49
1.10.3 Hand Protection 49
1.10.4 Foot Protection 49
1.10.5 Hearing Protection 50
1.10.5.1 Ear Plugs 50
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
1.10.5.2 Ear Muffs 50
1.10.6 Fall Restraining/Arresting Devices 50
1.10.7 Basic Personal Protective Equipment 52
1.11 RESPIRATORY PROTECTION 54

1.11.1 Selection of Equipment 54
1.11.1.1 Requirements For Use 54
1.11.1.2 Misuse 54
1.11.1.3 Hazardous Substances 55
1.11.2 Respiratory Protective Devices 56
1.11.2.1 Air Purifying Respirators 56
1.11.2.2 Supplied Air Respirators 56
1.12 FIRE PREVENTION 57

1.12.1 Before the Job Starts 57
1.12.2 Layout 58
1.12.3 Equipment Protection 58
1.12.4 Control of Ignition Sources 58
1.12.5 Flammable Liquids 59
1.12.5.1 Storage 59
1.12.5.2 Handling of Flammable Liquids 59
1.12.5.3 Ventilation 59
1.12.6 Combustible Materials 60
1.12.7 Housekeeping 60
1.12.8 Emergency Equipment 60
1.12.8.1 Water-Type Fire Extinguisher 60
1.12.8.2 Carbon Dioxide Type Extinguisher 60
1.12.8.3 Dry Chemical Type Extinguisher 61
1.12.8.4 Pressurized Water 61
1.12.8.5 Know Your Fire Extinguisher 61
1.12.9 Reporting a Fire 61
1.12.10 End-of-Shift Checks 62
1.12.11 Maintenance and Recording 62
1.13 TRANSPORTATION 63
1.13.1 Driver Requirements 63
1.13.2 Driver's Responsibilities 63
1.13.3 Vehicle Condition 63
1.13.4 Emergencies 66
1.13.4.1 Remain at Scene 66
1.13.5 Passenger Seating and Seat Belts 66
1.13.6 Desert Driving 67
1.13.6.1 Survival 67
1.13.6.2 Sand Tyres 68
1.14 WINTER WORK RULES 69

1.14.1 General Safety Statement 69
1.14.2 On-Site Safety Considerations 70
1.14.2.1 Exposure to Cold Temperatures 70
1.14.3 Personnel Protection and First Aid 71
1.14.3.1 Personnel Equipment 71
1.14.3.2 First Aid 71
1.14.3.3 Note to Physician 71
1.14.3.4 Environmental Considerations for Winter construction. 71
1.15 WORK PERMIT SYSTEM 72

1.15.1 Restricted Areas 72
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
1.15.2 Precautions 72
1.15.2.1 Checklist 72
1.15.2.2 Clear Area 72
1.15.2.3 Work Stoppage 72
1.15.3 Handling of Issued Work Permit 73
1.15.4 Closing Out the Permit 73
1.15.5 Hold Tags and Multiple Lockouts 73
1.15.6 Rules on Work Permit Procedure 74
1.15.7 LOCK OUT AND TAG 74
2. PART 2 - GENERAL AND CIVIL 75
2.1 EXCAVATIONS, TRENCHING AND SHORING 75

2.1.1 Before Work Starts 77
2.1.2 Work Permit 77
2.1.3 Underground Obstructions 77
2.1.4 General Precautions 78
2.1.4.1 Shoring Protective Systems 78
2.1.4.2 Personnel Protection 78
2.1.4.4 Clearance 79
2.1.4.5 Mechanical Excavator 79
2.1.4.6 Walkways 79
2.1.5 Access and Egress 79
2.1.6 Hazardous Atmospheres and Materials 79
2.1.6.1 Ventilation 79
2.1.6.2 Exhaust Gases 79
2.1.7 Edge Protection, Markers and Fixed Lighting 80
2.1.8 Backfilling 80
2.1.9 Hydraulic Shoring For Trenches 80
2.1.10 Timber Shoring For Trenches 80
2.2 DEMOLITION 81
2.2.1 Original Drawings 82
2.2.1.1 Disconnections 82
2.2.1.2 Adjacent Structures and Public Areas 82
2.2.1.3 Barricades/Signs 82
2.2.2 Method of Demolition 82
2.2.2.1 Demolition Of Buildings With Asbestos / Insulation Materials 82
2.2.3 Stability During Demolition 82
2.2.4 Working Place Clearance 83
2.2.4.1 Access 83
2.2.4.2 Glass Removal 83
2.2.5 Structural Steel Removal 83
2.2.6 Tanks, Vessels and Pipe Work (Explosion Prevention) 83
2.2.6.1 Welding and Hot Cutting 83
2.2.6.2 Cold Cutting 83
2.2.7 Protective Clothing and Equipment 83
2.2.8 Mechanical Equipment Guards 84
2.3 ASBESTOS AND OTHER FIBERS 85

2.3.1 Types of Asbestos 85
2.3.2 Health Risks 85
2.3.3 Storage and Transportation 86
2.3.4 Work Area 86
2.3.5 Handling and Use 86
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
2.3.5.1 Wetting Ventilation 86
2.3.5.2 Cutting 86
2.3.5.3 Protective Equipment 86
2.3.6 Protective Clothing 87
2.3.6.1 Types 87
2.3.6.2 Contamination 87
2.3.7 Respiratory Equipment 87
2.3.7.1 Type 87
2.3.7.2 Use 87
2.3.7.3 Care 87
2.3.8 Washing and Changing Facilities 88
2.3.9 Disposal of Waste Asbestos Materials/Clothing 88
2.3.10 Cleanliness of Work Areas and Equipment 88
2.4 PILING OPERATIONS 89

2.4.1.1 Cranes 89
2.4.1.2 Pile Gates 89
2.4.1.4 Wedges 90
2.4.1.5 Timber Block 90
2.4.1.6 Ground Support 90
2.4.2 Driving Piles 90
2.4.2.1 Pitching 90
2.4.2.2 Driving 90
2.4.3 Pile Extraction 91
2.4.4 General Precautions 91
2.5 ROADWORKS 92
2.5.1 General 92
2.6 WORKING PLACES, LADDERS, AND SCAFFOLDING 93

2.6.1 Working Places, General 93
2.6.1.1 Falls 93
2.6.1.2 Access and Egress 93
2.6.1.3 Lighting 93
2.6.1.4 Prevention of Falls 93
2.6.1.5 Ramps 93
2.6.1.6 Falling Material 94
2.6.1.7 Hot Surfaces 94
2.6.1.8 Slipping and Tripping 94
2.6.1.9 Roof Work 94
2.6.1.10 Insecure Structures 94
2.6.1.11 Work Over Water 94
2.6.2 Ladders and Stepladders 95
2.6.2.1 Selection 95
2.6.2.2 Condition 95
2.6.2.3 Position 95
2.6.2.4 Use 96
2.6.2.5 Stepladders 97
2.6.2.6 General 98
2.6.3 Scaffolding Components 98
2.6.3.1 Tubing 98
2.6.3.2 Aluminum Tubing 98
2.6.3.3 Fittings 98
2.6.3.4 Typical Scaffold Fittings 99
2.6.3.5 Planks 99
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
2.6.4 Requirements Common to All Scaffolding 101

2.6.4.1 Foundations 101
2.6.4.2 Posts 101
2.6.4.3 Runners 101
2.6.4.4 Bearers 102
2.6.4.5 Board Bearers 102
2.6.4.6 Bracing 102
2.6.4.7 Ties 102
2.6.4.8 Platform Units 103
2.6.4.9 Guardrail Systems and Toeboards 103
2.6.4.10 Access 103
2.6.4.11 Scaffold Ladders 104
2.6.4.12 Workmanship 105
2.6.4.13 Inspections 105
2.6.5 Fabricated Tubular Frame and System Scaffolding 105
2.6.6 Tube and Coupler Scaffolds 106
2.6.6.1 Independent Tied Scaffold 106
2.6.6.2 Light Duty Tube and Coupler Scaffolds 106
2.6.6.3 Medium Duty Tube and Coupler Scaffold 107
2.6.6.4 Heavy Duty Tube and Coupler Scaffolds 108
2.6.7 Free-Standing Tower Scaffolds 108
2.6.7.1 General Requirements 108
2.6.7.2 Design, Loading and Dimensions 109
2.6.7.3 Runners and Bearers 109
2.6.7.4 Bracing 109
2.6.7.5 Ties 109
2.6.7.6 Platform 109
2.6.7.7 Access 109
2.6.7.8 Limitations 110
2.6.8 Mobile Tower Scaffolds 110
2.6.8.1 Foundations 110
2.6.8.2 Operation 110
2.6.8.3 Limitations 110
2.6.9 Scaffolds for Tanks and Vessels 110
2.6.9.1 Bracket Scaffolds 110
2.6.10 Special Scaffolds 111
2.6.11 Scaffold Terminology 111
2.7 HAND TOOLS AND POWER TOOLS 114

2.7.1 Hand Tools, General 114
2.7.1.1 Quality 114
2.7.1.2 Cleanliness 114
2.7.1.3 Repair and Storage 115
2.7.1.4 Electrical Risks 115
2.7.2 Individual Hand Tools, Precautions 115
2.7.2.1 Screwdrivers 115
2.7.2.2 Hammer 115
2.7.2.3 Chisels 115
2.7.2.4 Picks and Shovels 116
2.7.2.5 Spanners and Wrenches 116
2.7.2.6 Pipe Wrenches 116
2.7.2.7 Pliers 116
2.7.2.8 Jacks 116
2.7.2.9 Hacksaws 116
2.7.2.10 Hand saws 117
2.7.3 Power Tools, General 117
2.7.3.1 Quality 117
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
2.7.3.2 Repair and Storage 117

2.7.4 Pneumatic Tools 117
2.7.4.1 General 117
2.7.4.2 Individual Tools, Precautions 118
2.7.5 Cartridge Operated Tools 119
2.7.5.1 General 119
2.7.5.2 Storage 120
2.7.5.3 Selection and Training of Personnel 120
2.7.5.4 Personal Protective Equipment 120
2.7.5.5 Issue and Returns 121
2.7.5.6 Use 121
2.7.5.7 Maintenance and Repair 122
2.7.6 Electrically Operated Tools 123
2.7.6.1 General 123
2.7.6.2 Maintenance and Storage 123
2.7.6.3 Monthly Inspections 124
2.7.6.4 Personal Protective Equipment 124
2.7.6.5 Individual Tools, Precautions 124
2.7.7 General 126
2.7.7.1 Training: 126
2.7.7.2 Duties Of Employed Persons: 126
2.7.7.3 Working Environment: 126
2.7.7.4 Guards: 126
2.7.7.5 Top Guard: 126
2.7.7.6 Bottom Guard: 126
2.7.7.7 Push Sticks: 127
2.8 PAINTS AND COATINGS 128

2.8.1 Flammability Hazards of Coating Materials 128
2.8.1.1 Flammable Materials 128
2.8.1.2 Flash Point (Definition) 128
2.8.1.3 Flammable (Explosive) Limits (Definition) 128
2.8.1.4 Fire Precautions 128
2.8.2 Health Hazards Associated With Paints 128
2.8.2.1 Toxic Materials 129
2.8.2.2 Dermatitic Materials 129
2.8.2.3 Prevention of Health Hazards 129
2.8.3 Ventilation in Confined Spaces 130
2.8.4 Surface Preparation 130
2.8.4.1 Abrasive Blast Cleaning 131
2.8.4.2 Hydroblast and Steam Cleaning 131
2.8.4.3 Hand and Power Tool Cleaning 131
2.8.4.4 Chemical Cleaning 131
2.8.4.5 General Safety in Surface Preparation 132
2.8.5 Personal Protective Equipment 132
2.8.6 Paint Application 133
2.8.6.1 Paint Materials 133
2.8.6.2 General Safety In Paint Application 133
2.8.6.3 Scaffolding and Ladders 133
2.8.6.4 Tarring Operations 133
2.8.7 General Safety for Paints and Coatings 135
2.9 CONCRETE, CONCRETE FORMS, AND SHORING 136

2.9.1 General 136
2.9.2 Reinforcing Steel 136
2.9.3 Bulk Concrete Handling 136
2.9.4 Concrete Placement 136
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
2.9.4.1 Concrete Mixers 136

2.9.4.2 Guardrails 136
2.9.4.3 Bull Floats 136
2.9.4.4 Powered Concrete Trowels 137
2.9.4.5 Concrete Buggies 137
2.9.4.6 Pumpcrete Systems 137
2.9.4.7 Concrete Buckets 137
2.9.4.8 Discharging on Slope 137
2.9.4.9 Back-Up Man, Truck Spotter 137
2.9.4.10 Pneumatic Hose 137
2.9.5 Vertical Shoring 138
2.9.5.1 General Requirements 138
2.9.5.2 Tubular Welded Frame Shoring 138
2.9.6 Forms and Shoring 138
2.9.6.1 General Provisions 138
2.9.6.2 Vertical Slip Forms 139
2.9.6.3 Tube and Coupler Shoring 139
2.9.6.4 Single Post Shores 139
3. PART 3 - MECHANICAL 141
3.1 GENERAL 141

3.1.1 WELDING, CUTTING, AND BRAZING 141
3.1.1.1 Gas Welding: Oxy-Acetylene Equipment and Use 141
3.1.1.2 Electric Arc Welding 146
3.1.1.3 Protective Measures 148
3.1.1.4 Welding and Cutting: Tanks, Vessels and Drums 149
3.1.1.5 Confined Spaces 149
3.1.1.6 Personnel Protection 150
3.1.1.7 Health Hazards 150
3.1.2 Right of Way 152
3.1.3 Ditching 152
3.1.4 Stringing and Bending 152
3.1.5 Cleaning, Coating and Wrapping 153
3.1.6 Lowering 153
3.1.7 Crossing and Tie-in 153
3.1.8 Backfilling and Clean-up 154
4. PART 4 - MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS 155
4.1 CRANES AND LIFTING EQUIPMENT 155

4.1.1 Competent Person 155
4.1.2 Crane Operations (General Requirements) 155
4.1.3 Crane Operator Qualifications 156
4.1.4 Special Crane Operating Procedures 156
4.1.5 Effect of Wind Speeds on Crane Operations 156
4.1.6 Overhead Power Lines 156
4.1.7 PRE-LIFT OPERATION CHECKLIST 157
4.1.8 Lift Plan For Cranes 159
4.2 SLINGS AND LIFTING GEAR (RIGGING) 161

4.2.1 Safe Working Load (SWL) 161
4.2.2 Chain Slings 161
4.2.2.1 Grades 161
4.2.2.2 Repairs 161
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
4.2.3 Wire Rope Slings 162

4.2.3.1 Damaged slings shall be destroyed if there are: 162
4.2.3.2 Wire Rope Sling Inspection Log 162
4.2.4 Synthetic Webbing Slings 163
4.2.4.1 Removal from Service 163
4.2.4.2 Repaired Slings 163
4.2.5 Synthetic and Natural Fiber Rope Slings 163
4.2.6 Care of Slings 164
4.2.7 Hooks 164
4.2.8 Spreader Bars 164
4.2.9 Eyebolts And Safety Hoist Rings 165
4.2.10 Shackles 165
4.2.11 Rigger 165
4.3 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT 166

4.3.1 Operators 166
4.3.1.1 Qualifications 166
4.3.2 Machinery Guards 166
4.3.2.1 Multi-Piece Tyre Rims and Locking Rings 166
4.3.3 General Requirements 166
4.3.4 Compressors 167
4.3.5 Concrete Mixers and Batching Plants 167
4.3.6 Dumpe rs and Dump Trucks 168
4.3.7 Excavators 169
4.3.8 Fork Lift Trucks 169
4.3.9 Generators 170
4.3.9.1 Fire Prevention Guide for Portable Generators 170
4.3.10 Graders, Dozers, Scrapers, Loaders And Miniloaders 170
4.3.11 Woodworking Machinery 171
4.4 MATERIALS HANDLING 172

4.4.1 Planning 172
4.4.2 Machine Transport 173
4.4.2.1 Dumpers 173
4.4.2.2 Tractors and Trailers 173
4.4.2.3 Conveyor Belts and Monorails 173
4.4.2.4 Concrete Pumps 173
4.4.3 Site Stores 174
4.4.4 Manual Handling 174
5. PART 5 - ELECTRICAL AND RADIATION 175
5.1 ELECTRICITY 175

5.1.1 Voltage 175
5.1.2 Temporary Installations 175
5.1.3 Hand Tools and Lighting 176
5.1.3.1 General Precautions: 176
5.1.4 Work on Live Equipment 176
5.1.5 Overhead and Underground Cables 177
5.1.5.1 Overhead Lines 177
5.1.5.2 Underground Cables 178
5.1.6 Overhead Power Transmission and Distribution 178
5.1.6.1 Initial Inspections, Tests, or Determinations 178
5.1.6.2 De-energizing Lines and Equipment 178
5.1.6.3 Emergency Procedures and First Aid 178
5.1.6.4 Night Work 178
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
5.1.6.5 Work Near/Over Water 179

5.1.6.6 Hydraulic Fluids 179
5.1.6.7 Live-Line Tools (Hot Sticks) 179
5.1.6.8 Material Handling 179
5.1.6.9 Grounding for Protection of Workers 180
5.1.6.10 Overhead Lines 181
5.1.6.11 Underground Lines 184
5.1.6.12 Construction in Energized Substations 185
5.1.7 Electric Shock 186
5.2 IONIZING RADIATION 187

5.2.1 Methods of Protection Against Radiation 187
5.2.1.1 Distance 187
5.2.1.2 Time 187
5.2.1.3 Shielding 187
5.2.2 Classification of Personnel and Exposure Limits 188
5.2.2.1 Radiographer 188
5.2.3 Shipping and Transportation 188
5.2.4 Storage Areas 188
6. PART 6 - CHEMICAL AND OPERATIONS 189
6.1 LIQUEFIED PETROLEUM GASES 189

6.1.1 General 189
6.1.2 Storage 189
6.1.3 Handling of Cylinders 190
6.1.4 Leakage 190
6.1.5 Transportation 190
6.1.6 Operation 191
6.1.7 Action in Case of Fire 191
6.1.8 Bulk Installations 192
6.1.9 First Aid 192
6.2 CHEMICALS 193

6.2.1 Health Hazards 193
6.2.1.1 Inhalation Pathway Hazard 193
6.2.1.2 Skin Hazards 194
6.2.1.3 Hazards of Swallowing Chemicals 194
6.2.2 Emergency Treatment 194
6.2.2.1 Artificial Respiration 194
6.2.2.2 First Aid 194
6.2.2.3 Showers and Eyewash Fountains 194
6.2.3 Fire Hazards 195
6.2.4 Reactivity Hazards 196
6.2.5 Transportation, Storage and Disposal 197
6.2.5.1 Transportation 197
6.2.5.2 Storage 197
6.2.5.3 Containers 197
6.2.5.4 Disposal 197
6.3 COFFERDAMS 198

6.3.1 Design 198
6.3.3 Construction 199
6.3.4 Potential Hazards 199
6.3.4.1 Structural Collapse 199
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
6.3.4.2 Overhead Loads 199

6.3.4.3 Dislodgment of Struts and Walls 199
6.3.5 Inspection 200
6.3.6 Leaks 200
7. PART 7 - BLANK FORMS 201
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
1. PART 1 - ADMINISTRATION
1.1 BONATTI ALCOHOL AND DRUGS POLICY
BONATTI policy is to commit itself in creating and maintaining a safe, sound and productive work
environment for all its employees.
BONATTI is convinced that the abuse of smoking, alcohol, drugs and other similar substances by the
employees is harmful for the health of the employees themselves, that these abuses have a negative
influence on the overall working performance and that they can cause accidents.
The smoking restrictions will be clearly indicated with placards, in the areas such as those where
inflammable or explosive material is stored.
The consumption or use of alcoholic drinks, drugs or similar substances is prohibited during working
hours. BONATTI also suggests that, consistent with this policy, the employees also refrain from
consuming these substances even after working hours, as the consequent effects could last and
effect their following work activities.
The employees who abuse of these substances can be temporarily assigned with tasks which are
not hazardous for themselves or for others, also to keep in line with the legal obligations of the
company in providing safe working environments.
The use, possession, distribution or sale of alcohol and illegal drugs, or drugs which are subject to
control and not prescribed by a doctor, is strictly prohibited on the company’s premises and is a
motive for adequate disciplinary action leading to dismissal.
BONATTI can invite the people who abuse of alcohol or drugs to consult the special medical facilities
so as to start suitable therapy before their state of health can negatively influence their capacity to
judge and/or work and be hazardous for their own safety and/or that of their work colleagues or third
parties, as well as the general safety of the working environments.
BONATTI shall request its sub-contractors and sub-suppliers to comply with its policy regarding
alcohol and drugs, or to adopt one of their own with similar contents and/or compatible with its
objectives.
BONATTI reserves the right to carry out, without prior notice, controls on the presence on its own
premises or in its own working areas, of drugs and alcohol and to request the respective
supervisors, such as employers or the competent Authorities, to remove the personnel of third
parties who are in situations that constitute a hazard for the safety of the environments or the work.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
1.2 BONATTI SAFETY POLICY
Bonatti undertakes to provide its employees with:
 A safe place of work

 Trained and Competent Colleagues
 The necessary tools, in a safe condition, to safely complete tasks
 Safety Management Systems and Work Procedures designed to protect the individual, the plant
and the environment.
 Opportunities to establish and maintain the Safety Culture by reporting Accidents, Incidents, Near
Misses, Unsafe Conditions and making Safety Suggestions
 Speedy rectification of reported/identified unsafe conditions or procedures
 Open, honest and effective Accident/Incident Investigations with findings being available to the
workforce. Achievable recommendations will be made and implemented to prevent recurrence.
Employees will be responsible to Bonatti for
 Positive compliance with and support for existing Safety Procedures and Initiatives
 Maintaining Housekeeping standards in their workplace
 Disposing of waste into the correct, designated container
 Wearing the correct PPE as specified by Site Rules and any Work Permit they are working under
or as required by location and circumstance
 Obeying all Safety Signs and Barriers
 Only undertaking tasks in which they are competent and authorised
 Thoroughly reading and understanding assigned Work Permits along with any attachments
 Reporting either verbally or in writing, any unsafe condition or act that they witness
 Immediately reporting to their Supervisor or the Bonattl Site Manager any Accident/Incident or
Near Miss.
Bonatti is committed to the prevention of accidents to minimize loss of life or bodily injury to its
employees, damage to its physical assets and the environment. In fulfilling this commitment, which is
as essential and equally important as construction and project objectives, Bonatti will provide and
maintain a safe and healthy work environment and will provide protection against foreseeable
hazards resulting from its operations. Loss resulting from accidental occurrences can be minimized
through good management. Safety is one aspect of this loss control philosophy and is the direct
responsibility of line management.
All management functions, including business line and associated management, will comply with
National Government and Company Safety requirements applicable to the design, operation,
maintenance and construction of facilities and/or equipment. When conformity with any of these
requirements is not practicable or cost effective, an amendment to such a requirement will be
considered. Reviews for compliance with this policy will be performed on a selective basis.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
1.2.1 SAFETY POLICY IMPLEMENTATION
1.2.1.1 COMPLIANCE WITH CONSTRUCTION AND PROJECT REQUIREMENTS
The application of the best industry safety practices minimises risk to personnel, property and the
environment. The design, construction, modification, operation and maintenance of facilities and
equipment and construction as practiced by Bonatti, will meet National Government and the Clients
safety requirements as covered in this manual and in relevant General Instructions, including the
Company's Construction Standards. When conformity with any of these requirements is impractical
or not cost effective, a waiver will be sought from Head Office.
1.2.1.2 OPERATING STANDARDS AND INSTRUCTIONS
Risks that cannot be eliminated through design are controlled by operating standards and
instructions. Compliance with safety standards and instructions will be consistently enforced for
Bonatti Construction and Projects personnel.
1.2.1.3 PERSONAL PROTECTION
Personal protective equipment, will be used to help to protect all employees against exposure to
safety and health hazards (e.g., welding, working at height, etc.) which cannot be eliminated.
1.2.1.4 INSPECTION
Inspections to detect and correct unsafe practices and conditions will be conducted periodically by
the Bonatti Representative.
1.2.1.5 EDUCATION AND TRAINING
All employees shall be provided with ongoing safety education and training as well as helping to
develop those skills that are required to perform, supervise and manage assigned tasks without
mishap.
1.2.1.6 MOTIVATION AND RECOGNITION
Good communications, a viable suggestion system and the recognition of good safety performance,
encourages employee participation in safety programmes
1.2.1.7 JOB PLACEMENT
Employees must only be assigned tasks that are consistent with their physical capacities and job
skills; this enable employees to work without endangering themselves or others.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
1.2.1.8 RESPONSE TO ACCIDENTAL OCCURRENCES
Site specific effective emergency response plans must be established as per the guidelines in this
manual. These should include measures to contain or control an emergency or disaster when an
accident occurs to minimise the loss of resources, a reporting and investigation system to determine
the cause of the accident, and the adoption of corrective actions to avoid a recurrence,
1.2.1.9 TRAFFIC SAFETY
Operators of Company vehicles must receive driving training and driver evaluations and be in
possession of a current National government driver's license. A vehicle operator will be held
accountable for the vehicle assigned to him and he must ensure that it is always operated in a safe
and lawful manner.
1.2.1.10 ACCOUNTABILITY
All employees shall be held accountable for personal and functional safety performance. An important
factor in an employee's overall job performance evaluation will be how well the employee meets his
safety responsibilities.
1.2.1.11 COMPLIANCE REVIEWS
On a selective basis, compliance reviews will be conducted by teams that include people with related
expertise to determine compliance with this policy. In order to ensure the credibility and effectiveness
of the review, the team members must be detached from the operation being reviewed.
1.2.1.12 STANDARDS AND INSTRUCTIONS
All work and equipment must conform to Bonatti Standards and General Instructions. Where no
standard or instruction is available to cover a particular item, the Bonatti Site or Project Manager shall
request that Bonatti Head Office specify the standard of work or equipment required.
1.2.1.13 WRITTEN PROGRAM
Prior to the commencement of contractual activity, Bonatti shall submit a written jobspecific Safety
programme to the Client company representative. The programme shall address the following:
1 . Title page
2. Project title and brief scope of work
3. Organization chart
4. Vicinity map and key plan
5. Hazard identification plan
6. Traffic plan
7. Safety policy and assignment of responsibilities
8. Safety inspections
9. Safety reports and records
10. Camp sanitation and safety
11. Welding and cutting equipment
12. Personal protective equipment
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
13. Tools and portable power tools

14. Ladders
15. Cartridge operated tools
16. Electrical installation and equipment
17. Scaffolding
18. Cranes and rigging equipment
19. Mechanical equipment
20. Transportation
21. Injury and damage reporting
22. Excavation
23. Fire prevention
24. Form work
25. First-aid facilities
26. Dust control
27. Job site inspections
28. General safety rules
29. Hazardous material and waste management
30. Ionizing radiation
31. Work over or adjacent to water
32. Abrasive blasting & painting/coating
32.1.1.1 HAZARD IDENTIFICATION PLAN
As part of this Safety Program, Bonatti shall develop a detailed Hazard Identification
Plan based on the initital hazard identification data supplied by the Client.
Prior to the start of construction or project, Bonatti shall conduct a hazard

identification tour with the Client representative. Once this has been completed,
Bonatti will prepare and submit a Hazard Identification Plan.
32.1.1.2 SAFETY DISCUSSION
Bonatti Site or Project Manager shall ensure that every craft and crew supervisor holds
a weekly ten-minute safety meeting with his men to discuss hazards on the job, and
review and update procedures to prevent accidents. These weekly meetings shall be
documented and such documentation shall be maintained and made available for
review at the on - site office.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
1.2.2 DISCIPLINARY CODE
Bonatti has developed and will implement clear rules, including a disciplinary action program, for
cases of violation of these Site Safety Manual Requirements as set out below:
Bonatti - Project Disciplinary Procedure on Safety

Violation 1st Offence 2nd Offence 3rd Offence
1. Failure to observe a common safety rule or Verbal warning Written warning with 3 hours Written warning with 5 days
practice of penalty suspension and
dismissal notice
2. Failure to use or wear proper safety shoes Verbal warning Written warning with 3 hours Written warning with 5 days
and/or PPE when working of penalty suspension and
dismissal notice
3. Operating machines/equipt without the consent Written warning with 3 Written warning with 5 days Dismissal
or knowledge of supervisor hours of penalty suspension and dismissal
notice
4. Failure to immediately report a personal Written warning with 3 Written warning with 5 days Dismissal
accident or injury while at work. hours of penalty suspension and dismissal
notice
5. Tampering with switches, controls, installations, Written warning with 5 Dismissal
machines or equpt days suspension and
dismissal notice
6. Failure to irnmediately report an accident Written warning with 3 Written warning with 5 days Dismissal
involving a company vehicle. hours of penalty suspension and dismissal
notice
7. Engaging in horseplay, running or throwing Written warning with 3 Written warning with 5 days Dismissal
things hours of penalty suspension and dismissal
notice
8. Smoking within prescribed prohibited areas Written warning with 5 Dismissal
days suspension and
dismissal notice
9. Engaging in any obvious unsafe act. Verbal warning Written warning with 3 hours Written warning with 5 days
of penalty suspension and
dismissal notice
10. Driving company vehicles in excess of required Verbal warning Written warning with 3 hours Written warning with 5 days
speed of penalty suspension and
dismissal notice
11. Obstructing aisles, fire exits and emergency Verbal warning Written warning with 3 hours Written warning with 5 days
equipment locations of penalty suspension and
dismissal notice
12. Act against public morals Written warning with 3 Written warning with 5 days Dismissal
hours of penalty suspension and dismissal
notice
13. Removing or damaging safety signs Written warning with 3 Written warning with 5 days Dismissal
hours of penalty suspension and dismissal
notice
14. Unauthorized use of fire equipment other than Written warning with 3 Written warning with 5 days Dismissal
its primary purpose hours of penalty suspension and dismissal
notice
15. Failure to report used or damaged fire Verbal warning Written warning with 3 hours Written warning with 5 days
equipment of penalty suspension and
dismissal notice
16. Violation of warning signs posted in working Written warning with 3 Written warning with 5 days Dismissal
areas hours of penalty suspension and dismissal
notice
17. Failure to provide warning signs in the vicinity Written warning with 3 Written warning with 5 days Dismissal
where overhead work is being performed hours of penalty suspension and dismissal
notice
18. Using defective ladders, scaffoldings, Written warning with 3 Written warning with 5 days Dismissal
improvised or unsuitable objects to perform hours of penalty suspension and dismissal
work notice
19. Working in a drunken state Written warning with 5 Dismissal
days suspension and
dismissal notice
20. Act against construction integrity or site safety Written warning with 5 Dismissal
rules days suspension and
dismissal notice
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
21. Improper act or verbal injuries against person Written warning with 5 Dismissal
having higher authority and responsibility days suspension and
dismissal notice
NOTES:
1. Depending on the gravity of an offense, degree of culpability, record of employee and other factors, an
employee may be awarded a penalty one or two degrees higher than the penalties described above
provided that the same is approved jointly by the Site or Project Manager and the Supervisor. Mitigating
factors can be used to offset aggravating circumstances in order to arrive at an appropriate penalty.
2. It is possible for an employee to have accumulated various disciplinary penalties for different offenses
within a twelve-month period. When this occurs, the following shall apply:
i) An employee who has his personnel record two (2) previous suspensions shall be
terminated for any offense he subsequently commits twelve (12) months from the
date his suspension took place.
ii) An employee who has been previously issued four (4) written warning shall be terminated for any
offense he subsequently commits twelve (12) months from the date his first written warning was
issued.
Penalty for subsequent offense(s) should not be lighter than the penalty imposed for the immediate
preceding offense.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
1.3 BONATTI SAFETY SERVICES
1.3.1 SAFETY PROGRAMME
Bonatti Head Office ensures that a range of safety services are provided including some or all of the
following:
 Conducing safety reviews and incident investigations with Client and local area management.
 Administering safety-related training programs for local area operations management and
personnel in an effort to enhance the safety awareness of projects personnel and proper
acceptance of responsibilities.
 Directing program reviews of operations involving procedures and facilities with follow-up on
implementation of recommendations resulting from these reviews.
 Interfacing with the Client to provide input on safety related issues and providing monitoring to
assure conformity.
 Assisting with the development of formal Safety programmes; ensuring consistency with Bonatti
and business line policies, principles and practices., and providing consultative services in their
implementation.
 Analysing, interpreting and reporting accident statistical data.
 Initiating and administering safety training.
 Identifying and assessing processes, operations and other risks (or hazards) and recommending
solutions.
 Advising on proper selection and use of personal protective equipment and evaluating its
effectiveness.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
1.4 ACCIDENT INVESTIGATION, ANALYSIS AND REPORTING
Much is learned through experience. A thorough investigation and analysis of an accident can help to
prevent future accidents.
To learn by experience, however, means that a system for the retrieval of information must be set up
and statistical records must be kept of injury, death and property and environmental damage.
With such a system operational, information can be collated and analyzed to show accident patterns.
The Company can then emphasize those areas in which safety education and training is needed
most.
Accident Investigation and Analysis.
This section covers these reporting requirements and the principles behind it:
1.4.1 DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
Accident An unexpected, unwanted event, causing loss, injury or illness, up to total

disability, interruption of business and fatality.
Environmental Incident: Any incident involving the discharge of pollutants into the environment (see
section 12 Environmental).
Fatality : Any death resulting from an occupational injury or illness.
First Aid Case: Any one-time treatment with any medication or therapy
(prescription or non-prescription) and subsequent observation,
which does not require medical care even though provided by a
physician or registered professional personnel.
Incident Something, merely occurring by chance or without intention or

calculation, which interrupts the normal line of events or course of
business
Lost Workday Case: Any industrial injury or illness in which the employee is unable to
return to work performing the regular duties within course and
scope of their job assignment, on the following day or any
subsequent day following the day of injury.
Medical Case: Any industrial injury or illness requiring treatment by a physician

that does not include lost time beyond the day of injury on illness.
Near Miss: An unexpected, unwanted event, not causing any loss, injury or
illness, but for luck or chance, can lead to an accident.
Occupational Illness: Any abnormal condition or disorder, other than one resulting from
an occupational injury, caused by repeated exposure to
environmental factors associated with employment.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
Occupational Injury. Any injury or illness, which results from a work incident or from a
single incident or exposure in the work environment,
Recordable Case: Any occupational injury or illness resulting in a medical case, a

restricted duty case, a lost workday case or a fatality,
Restricted Duty Case: Any injury or illness that results in restricted work activity or
transfer to another job or termination.
HS&E.. Health, Safety and Environment.
RCR (Recordable Cases Rate or IF) =
Number of recordable cases x 1,000,000

Total hours worked
SR (Severity Rate or IG)=
Number of lost workdays x 1,000

Total hours worked
1.4.2 REPORTS REQUIRED BY BONATTI HEAD OFFICE
Bonatti Site Manager shall ensure that an immediate report is made to Bonatti Head Office in the
case of all.
 Fatal injuries
 Injuries requiring medical attention which result in lost time
 Damage to Bonattl's plant or equipment
 Damage, of any amount, to Client's equipment or property
 Fires
 Damage and near misses to cranes and heavy equipment
For accidents involving Bonatti employee fatalities, serious injury to two or more Bonatti employees,
or damage to Client's equipment or property, a preliminary written report shall be submitted within 24
hours followed by a detailed written report submitted within three days to Bonatti Head Office.
Bonatti Site Manager shall maintain a current record showing all:

 Work injuries
 Fires
 Incidents of Bonatti property damage
 Motor vehicle accident
 Incidents involving damage to Client's equipment and property
 Damage and near misses to cranes and heavy equipment
The record shall be available for inspection at all times.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
In the case of serious accidents, however, a detailed account of the circumstances, witnesses'
statements and descriptive photographs are required.
In addition to the reports required above, the Bonatti Site Manager must keep a record of all injuries
and damages on a form approved by Bonatti Head Office.
1.4.3 ACCIDENT INVESTIGATION
The point of an accident investigation is to prevent recurrence of similar accidents; to determine facts
rather than to find faults.
The main reasons for conducting an accident investigation are:
1. To find the causes so that similar accidents may be prevented;
2. To determine the point at which "unplanned" events took over from the "planned" sequence of
events;
3. To recommend what corrective action should be taken
1.4.3.1 RESPONSIBILITIES FOR INVESTIGATION
Supervisor
The supervisor shall carry out an immediate investigation of any accident which occurs within his
area of responsibility. The preliminary accident report must be completed and submitted within 24
hours to the Client's representative with a copy to the Bonatti Head Office. A final report on the
incident shall be submitted within three days detailing any additional information and corrective action
needed.
Project Manager
The project manager shall review all accident reports to ensure that all the necessary corrective
action has been taken and that he has addressed any items that may require action on his part.
1.4.4 CASES TO BE INVESTIGATED
Incidents that result in property damage or serious injuries to personnel and hospitalisation of two or
more employees must be fully investigated and reported. Unless the real cause is known, the hazard
cannot be controlled in the future. The near-miss incident is equally important from the point of view
of prevention and should also be thoroughly investigated.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
1.4.5 ACCIDENT INVESTIGATION GUIDELINES
The scene of an accident must be left undisturbed until the investigation has been conducted. In
some cases the accident site must be rendered safe so as not to contribute to further accidents.
However precautions shall be taken to keep the accident scene intact as much as is possible, to
assist in the investigation. The investigation should include, but not be limited to the following:
1. Questioning the man in charge and finding out what was planned.
2. Finding out the injured man's job or the normal configuration and function of the damaged
equipment or plant.
3. Questioning the injured man as soon as possible.
4. Questioning the witnesses separately as to what they actually saw, not what they think
happened.
5. Studying the equipment or plant layout and noting any signs of misuse.
6. Finding the explanation of any irregularities.
7. From the information obtained, establishing the reason why the "unplanned"
events took over from those that were "planned".
8. Recommending items of corrective action and methods of implementing them

to prevent the recurrence of the incident.
9. Making a scaled drawing of the accident scene and supplement that with
supporting photographs.
1.4.6 ACCIDENT ANALYSIS
1.4.6.1 CLASSIFICATION
Site or Project Managers can use nine main classifications to analyse industrial accidents. Every Site
or Project Manager should go through the following classifications and their breakdowns to determine
which of these (if any) apply to the incidents in which they were involved.
These records help to illustrate accident trends In turn, this helps to evaluate our safety programme
and modify or upgrade it as needed.
This information is supplemental to the findings and reporting requirements of the preceding
"Accident Investigation" sections.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
The nine classifications with their individual breakdowns are:
1 Falls (of persons from heights) 5 Equipment

To the ground or another level Moving parts
From scaffolding Equipment in motion
From ladders Hot surface
Into holes, trenches, etc
Into water
1a Falls (of persons on the level) 6 Hand Tools
To the ground Cartridge hammers
Against objects Power tools
Non-power tools
2 Handling Objects 7 Transportation
From lifting Road
From pulling or pushing Site
Handling materials
Electric shock
3 Striking against Objects 8 Lifting appliances
Protruding nails Cranes
Scaffold tubes and fittings Hoists and winches
Stepping or kneeling on objects Pull-lifts, pulleys, wheels, etc
Piling frames
A-frames
Excavations
4 Struck by Objects 9 Hazardous Atmospheres
Falling objects Hydrogen sulfide
Foreign bodies in eyes Others
Flying objects
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
1.5 RESPONSIBILITY FOR SAFETY
The Bonatti Site or Project Manager must ensure the company's safety and accident prevention
policies are clearly understood by all employees. The duties and responsibilities of employees,
supervisors, and management must be stated in writing by the company's management. All
employees should satisfactorily discharge the responsibilities of their job, and be aware that their
safety record will be taken into account during performance appraisals.
The main responsibilities of various members of a construction or project team are cited in the
following:
1.5.1 SENIOR MANAGEMENT
 Initiate the company's policy for the control of injury, damage and fire.
 Administer the policy himself or appoint a senior member of staff to do so.
 Ensure that all supervisors are qualified and that they receive adequate and appropriate training.
 Make sure that in tendering, at planning stages and throughout the contract, allowance is made
for suitable and sufficient equipment to enable the jobs to be done with minimum risk.
 Coordinate safety activities between the Client and any other individual contractors who may be
working on the same site.
 Institute proper system for investigation, reporting and estimating the cost of injury, property
damage and fire loss. Initiate analysis to discover accident trends and promote action to prevent
recurrence.
 Reprimand any supervisor for failing to discharge satisfactorily the responsibility allocated to him.
 Set a personal example.
 Ensure that a formal Hazard Identification Plan is prepared in order to identify and correct
hazards which may be encountered during construction.
1.5.2 BONATTI SITE OR PROJECT MANAGER
Be aware of the following:
 Ways to prevent injury to personnel, damage to equipment and fires.

 Ways to improve existing work methods.
 Legal and contractual requirements affecting safety, health and welfare.
 Provision and use of protective clothing and equipment.
 Potential hazards on site before work starts and on the safety organisation required.
 Any changes in safety requirements.
Carry out site surveys to see that only safe work methods are in operation, that health and safety
requirements are being observed, and welfare and first aid facilities are adequate and properly
maintained.
 Determine the cause of any accident (or dangerous occurrence), and recommend means of
preventing recurrence of such an incident.
 Supervise the recording and analysis of information on injuries, damage and production loss.
Assess accident trends and review overall safety performance.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
 Arrange for the training of employees at all levels.

 Take part in discussions on injury, damage and loss control.
 Keep updated with recommended codes of practice and safety literature. Circulate information
applicable to each level of employees.
 Foster within the company an understanding that injury prevention and damage control are an
integral part of business and operational efficiency.
 Attend job progress meetings where safety is an item on the agenda. Report on job safety
performance.
1.5.3 CONSTRUCTION MANAGER/SUPERINTENDENT
 Understand the company's safety policy and the responsibility allocated to each grade of
supervision.
 Ensure that tenders adequately allow for sound working methods and reasonable welfare
facilities.
 Determine the following at the planning stage:
 The most appropriate order and method of performing the job.

 Storage areas, access, etc.
 Any hazards identified under the Hazard Identification Procedure
 Facilities for welfare, first aid and sanitation.
 Work permit procedures and requirements.
 Basic precautions for dealing with fire hazards.
 provide written instructions to establish work methods, explain the sequence of operations,
outline potential hazards at each stage, and indicate precautions to be adopted.
 Check over work methods and precautions with supervision before work starts.
 Create safety awareness by promoting safety meetings, presentations, open forum discussions
and by implementing safety training.
 Set a personal example on site by wearing appropriate protective clothing and equipment at all
times.
 Ensure that all accidents are reported to the Client and Bonatti Head Office in accordance with
Section 1.3
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
1.5.4 SUPERVISOR
 Ensure that all equipment purchased or hired is safe, is guarded and equipped with safety
devices and has been subjected to all necessary tests.
 Make certain that operators and attendants are employed only on equipment for which they have
been thoroughly trained.
 Check that periodic tests, inspections and maintenance are carried out when due.
 Attend promptly to all equipment defects and advise site management of the need for any
dangerous equipment to be taken out of service until properly repaired.
 Organise sites so that work is carried out to the required standard with minimum risk to men,
equipment and materials.
 Be familiar with work permit procedures.
 Give precise instructions on responsibilities for correct work methods.
 Plan and provide for good housekeeping.
 Position equipment effectively and ensure that electricity supply is installed, used and maintained
correctly.
 Check that equipment and tools (both power and hand tools) are maintained in good operating
condition.
 Make sure that all men know how to obtain and administer first aid properly and efficiently to all
injured persons. They should also know how to summon assistance in case of emergency and
nominate others to act in their absence.
 Make sure that suitable personal protective equipment is available and that it is used.
 Release men when necessary for safety and fire training.
1.5.5 FOREMAN
 Incorporate safety procedures in routine tasks and see that they are obeyed.
 Conduct weekly safety meetings with subordinates.
 Conduct daily work site inspections to identify and correct any existing unsafe conditions.
Document and coordinate the safety inspection activities and findings with the job or project
Bonattl Construction Manager/Superintendent.
 Correct unsafe acts, such as horseplay or the taking of unnecessary risks.
 Ensure that new employees are properly instructed in precautions to be taken before they are
allowed to start work.
 Commend men who, by action or initiative, eliminate hazards.
 Report accidents, unsafe conditions and defects in equipment to immediate superiors.
1.5.6 WORKER
 Use the correct tools and equipment for the job. Use protective clothing and equipment provided.
 Do nothing to endanger self or work mates.
 Keep tools in good condition.
 Refrain from horseplay and abuse of safety devices, equipment and welfare facilities.
 Report any accidents, near misses or hazardous conditions to immediate super-visor.
 Read the Company Safety Manual and take note of special safety precautions in restricted areas.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
 Obey all posted warning signs.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
1.5.7 TOOLBOX MEETING
Will be held each week on a Saturday morning, the meeting will reflect the topics of discussion during
the daily meetings and suggestions made by the crews to improve accident prevention on the
project. Each member of the crew present for the meetings will sign the Toolbox Meeting Report.
Typical topics for Saturday Toolbox Talks:
 Housekeeping
 Personal Protective Equipment
 Fire extinguisher training
 Scaffolding safety training
 Heat stress management
 Falling objects
 Respiratory protection
 General Safety rules
 1, Permit to Work
 Use of hand tools
1.5.8 INSPECTIONS AND SITE SAFETY TOURS
1.5.8.1 PURPOSE
Inspections, reviews, compliance checks and audits are basic tools to see if applicable rules and
regulations are being adhered to.
1.5.8.2 SAFETY INSPECTION PROGRAM
Inspections to identify and correct unsafe conditions and practices will be conducted by Bonatti on
the project in the following manner:
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
1.5.8.3 ROUTINE INSPECTIONS
The Bonatti Site Manager or his designate will conduct a routine safety inspection and monitoring at
worksite and, where required, prepare and issue to the responsible foreman/supervisor a "Safety
Violation/Hazard" for the required remedial action on identified safety hazards, unsafe conditions or
practices. Copies of issued Safety Violation/Hazard Notices will are kept on file by the Bonatti Site
Manager.
The Bonatti Site Manager or his designate shall, upon identifying an unsafe condition during his
routine safety monitoring, stop the work in those areas affected and initiate prompt appropriate action
to remedy the situation.
Foremen/supervisors will conduct daily work site inspections in their respective areas as part of their
daily activities, and shall initiate prompt corrective action to remedy any deficiencies, unsafe acts or
practices.
Areas of concern for daily inspections include but are not confined to:
 Housekeeping
 Electrical
 Scaffolding
 Work Permit compliance
 Personal Protective Equipment
No report will be issued for this purpose.
1.5.8.4 ROUTINE (FIXED TIME) INSPECTIONS
The Bonattl Site Management will conduct a fixed time General HS&E tour on a pre-arranged
schedule. During the tour, specialised items will be established.
Bonatti Site Management Team will actively participate at the fixed time Management Safety Tour.
Any deficiencies noted during this tour will be immediately addressed to the responsible foreman or
supervisor for prompt corrective measures.
TYPE ATTENDEES SUBJECTS FREQUENCY REPORT TO

HSE tour Site Manager & Subjects to vary, e.g. Daily Client
Supervisor Scaffolding
Housekeeping
Health & envi.
Confined space
General HSE Bonatti Management No standard checklist; Fixed day or fixed Attendees
tour specialized items will be time
established
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
1.6 EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
All Site/Projects managers and supervisors are expected to become familiar with the emergency
procedures of the plants and areas in which any of their staff are working or living. Bonatti site-
specific written emergency procedures shall be prepared and submitted as part of the Bonatti Safety
Programme plan.
1.6.1 RESPONSIBILITIES
Bonatti's employees, managers and supervisors are required to become familiar with the emergency
procedures of the areas and plants in which any of their staff are working and they should ensure
familiarization of their personnel with the emergency procedures.
1.6.2 INSTRUCTIONS
General Requirements
This instruction gives the basic response required by Bonatti employees in case of an emergency
affecting the construction or project site.
 All Bonatti employees will be fully familiar with and adhere to an approved Emergency Plan on the
project.
 A copy of the Emergency Plan will be maintained at the Bonatti Site Office and posted at
conspicuous locations within the office complex.
 Every foreman/supervisor must be constantly aware of the actual number of his men in his
respective area.
 Before starting work at any new location at site, the location and access routes to the pre-
determined Safe Assembly Area(s) shall be checked or known to ensure prompt evacuation from
the work area should the need arise. In addition to designated emergency access routes/assembly
areas, an alternate safe access/location shall be anticipated and used when the situation is
necessary. (ie the pre-determined routes/assembly areas become inaccessible.)
 Constant awareness of the specific Site Alarms and the basic steps to be taken in case of site
emergency shall be exercised by every individual while on the project site.
 Visiting Bonatti personnel and all other casual visitors on project site have to know the basic
Emergency Procedures in force on the project upon arrival at site and, under no circumstances,
enter the work site unaccompanied.
 Individual alertness on emergencies shall not only be confined to responding to emergency

situations arising within the site. The possibility of emergencies that could arise from an external
source or adjacent plants ie toxic gas release, spill of hazardous materials etc that could be wind
blown to the worksite shall also be anticipated and appropriate immediate actions to be taken.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
1.6.3 ACTION TO BE TAKEN
In an emergency, or on hearing the Site Emergency Alarm, either Fire or Gas Release Alarm, every
Bonatti foreman or supervisor shall ensure the following.
 All work is stopped at once.
 All equipment and power tools are isolated
 All men are evacuated on foot in an orderly manner to the pre-determined Safe Assembly Area or
Muster Point in a cross-wind direction.
 All foremen will wait for their employees in the muster areas. Foremen will ensure all employees
working in remote areas and in confined spaces (if any) have been alerted and have proceeded to
the muster area.
 Foremen will conduct a head count of their employees. If any employee is found to be missing,
foreman shall inform the Bonatti Site Manager at the Muster Area immediately with the
employee's name, and last known location of the employee. The Bonatti Site Manager will
subsequently relay this information to the Clients Safety Department.
 No attempt will be made to locate missing employees until a search is authorised by site
emergency personnel when so determined that a search and rescue party can be reasonably
protected during a search.
 No one is permitted to return to work until an instruction has been received from Site Operations
or Clients Safety Department that it is safe to do so.
 No one resumes work unless a new Work Permit is applied for and approved. (All issued work
permits are automatically cancelled during actual emergencies.)
Note: When driving. Upon hearing the Fire or Gas Release Alarm, park the vehicle on right side of the
road (clear of hydrants, etc) stop engine, leave the key inside the vehicle and proceed on foot to the
nearest assembly point in a cross wind direction and stay at the area until after instruction from Plant
Operation or the Clients Safety Department is received.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
1.6.4 EMERGENCY ASSEMBLY AREAS/MUSTER POINTS
 A copy of the Site Plot Plan showing the specific locations of safe assembly areas/muster points
will be posted in job site offices and the same shall be disseminated to all employees.
 If the designated assembly point is not accessible during an actual emergency, for some reason
(ie it is downwind or in close proximity to the scene of the emergency), then personnel must take
the safest route away from the emergency location, towards alternate assembly points/safe
assembly areas or open area in a cross or upwind direction.
 Locations of the specific assembly areas/muster points shall be emphasised during the Site
Safety Induction/Orientation and any change of the location of these designated areas in the plant
during the course of the project shall be promptly made known to all site employees.
1.6.5 SITE ALARMS
Specific alarms in the plant (ie Fire/Gas Release) will be described to all site personnel during their
Safety Site Induction/Orientation and occasionally during the Safety Toolbox Meetings. Copies of
these specific plant alarms will be prominently posted in job-site offices.
1.6.6 CONTACT AFTER OFFICE HOURS
The Bonatti Project or Site Manager shall give his home address and telephone number (and that of
his replacement) to the Client representative so that he may be contacted after hours in case of
emergency involving a Bonatti job or equipment. These telephone numbers are to be kept current and
posted at the j ob-site.
1.6.7 HELP IN AN EMERGENCY
In the event of an emergency situation (serious personal injury, fire, critical damage to operating
equipment, etc.) help may be obtained by contacting the Client. This may be done by:
 By telephone
 By radio
 By messenger
When transmitting a message by telephone, radio, or messenger, ensure that you clearly identify
yourself by giving:
 Your exact location

 Nature of emergency
 Service required and repeat the message
 Your name
 Your badge number
Stay on the telephone until you are told to hang up. If possible, post a lookout to direct the ambulance
or fire truck to the scene of the incident.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
1.7 SAFETY TRAINING
Good safety training is important to employees who are learning a new trade but it is also necessary
to keep supervisors and skilled operators up-to-date with current safety technology and practices.
Safe working practices are learned when employees understand how an accident was caused.
Measures can then be taken to prevent a recurrence. People who are trained to do their jobs
correctly can also be expected to do them safely.
1.7.1 SAFETY TRAINING FOR SUPERVISORS
The immediate job of preventing accidents falls upon the super-visor not because it has been
arbitrarily assigned to him, but because accident prevention are closely associated supervisory
functions.
The most direct way to develop the desired attitudes and to impart the necessary information about
safety to supervisors is to give them safety training.
The course for supervisors should include company and administrative policies and safety aspects
of the work likely to be undertaken by the supervisors. An outline of such a course is given in 1.6.3.1
of this section.
1.7.2 SAFETY TRAINING FOR WORKMEN
Accident prevention training for workmen should incorporate the items listed in 6.12.
1.7.2.1 INTEGRATED PRACTICES
Safe working practices must be integrated into training for specific skills.
It is expected that those who have attended recognized training establishments will have received the
necessary safety instructions.
1.7.2.2 SPECIALIZED TRAINING
Before their training is complete, new employees and new entrants to industry are more susceptible.
to accidents. On - Site management must provide safety orientation and training for new employees.
Induction training should teach new workers to identify common on-site hazards and how to guard
against them. It should also cover the main requirements of the company's accident prevention policy
and instruct newcomers specifically in those areas which affect them personally (e.g., if it is
company policy that safety helmets and protective footwear should always be worn, then this should
be made clear and they should be told how and where to obtain them.
Suitable induction courses together with job training containing an integrated safety content will go a
long way towards achieving safe working conditions.
Site supervision, however, must ensure that correct job methods are being utilized and workmen are
periodically reminded to be aware of hazards in the work place.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
1.7.2.3 USE OF PERSUASION
The training providing skill and information should be supplemented by the techniques of persuasion.
Persuasion has an important function and should not be overlooked in any comprehensive program.
It is commonly applied by the use of posters which graphically indicate bad habits, pin-point the
advantages of a safe working environment and give detailed information, advice, or instruction on
special safety points to remember.
Posters can be useful provided that:

 They are designed with due regard for the industry and its type of operation.
 They are displayed where workmen spend some time when not working and specific posters are
displayed where most appropriate (e.g., ladder hazards in ladder storeroom).
 They are mounted on properly designed and maintained bulletin boards.
 They are changed at frequent intervals.
 Only a few posters are displayed simultaneously.
Posters can stimulate thought on accident prevention, but they are no substitute for organized
training. The most effective posters are those that help to reinforce safety training.
1.7.2.4 COURSE REQUIREMENTS
An induction safety course for workmen should be aimed at specific hazards which they could
encounter at a specific job site. A suggested outline of such a course is given in 6.3.2.
1.7.3 SCOPE OF TRAINING
Safety training needs to be ongoing if it is to accomplish optimum results. The program material and
presentation should cover the safety subject and be interesting enough to hold the trainee's attention.
A limited training effort, such as an occasional safety meeting, may prompt supervisors to do a better
job for a short time, but interest starts to lag unless an effective safety training program is in place.
Good job safety instruction not only produces more skilled workers, but also impresses upon them
the high value that the employer places on job safety. Frequent follow-ups and attention by the
supervisor to correct work practices also help to create understanding and to eliminate resentment,
which is a source of some undesirable work attitudes.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
1.7.3.1 SAFETY TRAINING TOPICS FOR SUPERVISORS

1. The Law and Safety 2. Policy and Administration
Statutory requirements Effect of incentive on accident prevention
Appropriate regulations Human relations
Duties of employer and employee Consultation
3. Safety and Supervisor 4. Principles of Accident Prevention
Safety and efficient production togheter Attitudes of management, supervision and
Accidents affect morale and public relations operations Methods of achieving safe operations
Accident and injury causes
5. Site Inspection 6. Human Behavior
The role of management Motivating agencies
Hazard identification procedure Individual behavior
Records results Environmental effects
Follow-up procedures Techniques of
Feedback persuasion
7. Site Tidiness 8. Health
Site organizations Medical examination
Relationship of site housekeeping to accident occurrence Hazard to health on site
Site access
Equipment Sanitation and welfare
storage Material Protective clothing
stacking First AID/CPR
Material handling
9. Personal Protective Equipment 10. Electricity
Eye, face, hands, feet and legs Appreciation of electrical hazard and Power tools
Respiratory protective equipment Arc welding and Low voltage system
Protection against ionizing radiation Lighting and power system on site
Grounding/ground fault circuit interrupters (GFCIs)
11. Oxygen and Acetylene Equipment 12. Equipment
Cylinder storage and maintenance Accident related to moving parts of machinery
Conditions and maintenance of valve, regulators and Appreciation of principles of guarding
gauges Conditions and maintenance of hoses and fittings
Pressures Importance of regular maintenance
13. Transportation 14. Excavations
Transport to and from site Method of shoring
Hazard connected with site transport Precautions while shoring
Competent drivers Precautions at hedge of excavations
Dumpers and Tipping trucks Removal of shoring
Movement near excavations Sheet steel piling
15. Working Places, ladders and scaffolding 16. Cranes and other Lifting Machines
Hazards connected with the use of ladders Licensing, certification and training required for operation of
cranes
Maintenance and inspection Slinging methods and Signaling
Type of scaffolding Access to crane(s)
Overloading Maintenance and examinations
Works on roofs Ground conditions
Fragile materials Hazards and accident prevention methods connected with
Openings in walls and floors the use of different type of cranes/heavy equipment
Crane lift plan for all lifts
Use of safety belts and nets
17. Lifting tackle 18. Fire Prevention and Control
Slings - single and multi-legged Principle causes determining
Safe working loads fire Understanding fire
Safety hooks and eyebolts chemistry Fire fighting
Cause of failure equipment
Maintenance and examination Fire fighting training
19. Communications
Effective methods of communication (particular interest tonon-English speaking
workers) Methods and preparation of reports
Safety committees and Safety meetings
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
1.7.3.2 INDUCTION SAFETY TOPICS FOR WORKMEN
1. Hazard Identification Procedure
Hazards on site:
 Machinery
 Transport
 Flammables on site (hydrocarbon)
 Fire
 Falls
 Electricity
 Site housekeeping
 Handling materials
2. Precautions Against the Above Hazards
 Simple precautions that can be taken by workmen on site.
3. Personal Protective Equipment
 What is available
 How to obtain it
 Correct use and care
4. Health
 Site welfare facilities
 Potential health hazards
 First Aid/CPR
5. Duties of the Company

 Brief outline of the responsibilities of the Company by law
 Details of Company's accident prevention policy
6. Employee's Duties
 Brief outline of responsibilities of employee under law
 Explanation of how new employees fit into the Company's plan for accident
prevention.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
1.8 SITE PLANNING AND HOUSEKEEPING
This section outlines the procedure to be followed prior to and during a contract. It cannot claim to
cover every type of contract that is likely to occur, but it does provide a detailed logical process to
serve as a guide in deciding upon a plan of action
Protection of Outdoor Storage
1.8.1 INITIAL PLANNING
Prior to the start of any contract, an analysis is made to ensure that construction or the project will be
conducted in a safe manner. Similarly, accident prevention is analysed, both at the planning stage
and throughout the contract, so that the Company will be able to eliminate or reduce accidents.
Accident prevention is a real factor in the economic success of all contracts.
Among other factors that must be considered at the initial planning stage are: results of a Hazard
Identification Plan, loss prevention program, protection of employees and equipment. transportation,
lifting equipment, excavation, scaffolding and work in restricted areas requiring work permits.
1.8.1.1 HAZARD IDENTIFICATION PLAN
INTRODUCTION
In reviewing the safety requirements for our design and construction activities (i.e. new, modified or
rebuilt plants or facilities), it is difficult for even the most experienced engineer and/or contractor to
identify all the potential safety hazards that
may be encountered unless a systematic potential-hazard review is conducted as a part of a Hazard
Identification Plan (HIP).
The attached Hazard Identification Plan (HIP) provides the method for conducting such a review. The
hazards identified are classified as A, B or C according to their degree of potential human impact
considering severity and probability (i.e. from most severe and probable to least severe and probable)
during the initial design phase. This allows for a change in the methodology or operating procedure in
the direction of reducing the risk associated with the hazard to an acceptable level, or eliminating it
altogether.
The Company shall conduct a Hazard Identification tour with the Client's representatives to identify
potential hazards prior to construction start-up.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
HAZARD IDENTIFICATION PLAN :
I. Brief description of work to be accomplished.
Conduct Hazards Identification Review. (To include on-site tour)
Record hazards identified on location map.
II. List Potential Hazards
Each hazard will be classified A, B, or C. Statement of corrective action to be taken. Hazard areas
identified on a location map and color coded. Bonatti will submit this list to Client representative.
Consideration will be given to the following potential hazards:
Potential hazards to personnel. Potential hazards to the general public. Incompatible interface with
existing plants, facilities, procedures, regulations, engineering specifications, ground condition, etc.
Potential hazards that may be encountered from outside sources. Hazardous materials
identification/handling/storage. Potential fire / electrical hazards.
III. Hazard Classification
Once the hazards are identified, they are classified as Class A, B, or G
 Class 'A' Hazards:
A condition or practice likely to cause permanent disability, loss of life or body

part and/or extensive loss of structure, equipment or material. 0
 Class "B" Hazards:
A condition or practice likely to cause serious injury or illness (resulting in temporary disability) or
property damage that is disruptive, but less severe than Class "A".
 Class "C" Hazards: G
A condition or practice likely to cause minor (non-disabling) injury or illness or non-disruptive property
damage.
IV. Corrective Action
List all hazards identified in the HIP outline, and determine what corrective action should be taken.
Example: 'A' Hazards

 Overhead electrical power lines over building site
Electrical power rating, (KV)

 Show power lines on location map.
Corrective Action
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
Example: 'A' Hazard. "Overhead Power Lines" Corrective Action:
 Obtain work permit before starting any work under or near electrical power lines.
 No activity in area under power line until power lines have been disconnected and/or relocated.
Following are examples of typical hazards that can be encountered
1) Above Ground Potential Hazards
 Overhead power lines, list KV rating

 Bridges, by-passes
 Micro wave 1 communication towers
 Houses
 Traffic flow
 Facilities close-by
 Aircraft flight path
 Trees, poles
 High cliffs / dangerous overhangs
 Fuel / chemical / pressure vessels and systems
2) Ground Level Potential Hazards
 Electrical wires
 Roadways
 Ditches
 High water table
 Tie-downs
 Obstruction
 Unstable soil
 Fences/walls
 Traffic flow
 Guide wires
 Nearby buildings, schools, houses
 Possible flood or wash out areas
 Adverse weather conditions
 Hazards from nearby plants or operations, etc.
3) Underground Potential Hazards
 Buried utilities
 High water table
 Building foundations
 Underground water waste
 Unstable soil
 Chemical / trash dump area
 Voids in the earth (caves)
 Underground fuel / chemical / pressure systems and vessels
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
4) Interface Potential Hazards
 Existing emergency evacuation plans

 Emergency communication system
 Traffic flow
 Special personnel
 Protective equipment requirements
 Hazardous waste disposal
 Hazards from other outside operations
 Escape routes
 Evacuation alarms
 Access control
 Flammable liquid / chemical / pressure vessel storage
 Gas release into proposed area
5) Off-Shore Potential Hazards
 High wind / sea conditions

 Night time operations
 Inclement weather conditions
 Fog
 Rain
 Lightning
 Marine vessels and materials adrift
 Electrical hazards
1.8.1.2 SAFETY PROGRAMME
A Safety Programme for specific job-related activities part of proposed construction or project work
will be developed. Part of this program will be a ten-minute safety discussion with the workmen, at
least once a week, on the hazards at the site and the procedures to be followed to prevent personal
injury and minimize property damage.
1.8.1.3 TRANSPORTATION
TheCompany will provide transportation to and from the site for its employees. Employees must be
transported only in the passenger compartment of vehicles.
The provision of buses for larger sites will have to be considered. Inspection and maintenance of
vehicles and the selection and training of drivers are other major considerations.
1.8.1.4 LIFTING EQUIPMENT
Cranes, hoists and lifting equipment should be considered well ahead of actual requirements both
from the point of view of economical use and the safety of personnel and equipment. Lift plans shall
be submitted as required.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
1.8.1.5 DEMOLITION
Some contracts in existing plant areas may require demolition before new work can begin Only minor
demolition should be done by construction personnel. Specialist contractors should be employed for
the demolition of larger structures.
1.8.1.6 EXCAVATIONS
Timber for shoring, steel sheet piles, etc. should be present on site prior to starting excavation work.
All excavation work will be closely supervised by experienced staff.
1.8.1.7 SCAFFOLDING
For all work carried out above ground level where no permanent work place is available, temporary
work places in the form of scaffolding must be provided. An adequate supply of scaffold material
must be on site. There must be sufficient experienced men capable of erecting and dismantling the
scaffolding properly. Ladders, built to an acceptable standard, must be supplied and readily available
for access to elevated work areas.
1.8.2 SITE LAYOUT
The site layout must be planned before any work is started. This will assist in making the job easier
and more efficient, thus increasing productivity and profit.
Items to be considered under site layout include the following:
1.8.2.1 SITE ACCOMMODATION
This includes shacks, storage huts, compounds, racking areas, lock-up boxes, office buildings, etc.
1.8.2.2 ADEQUATE ACCESS ROADS
To be kept clear and unobstructed at all times
1.8.2.3 PROJECT SIGN
Erect project sign at the main entrance to the construction site and other sites, i.e., office, laydown
yard, fabrication yard, etc., as designated by the Company representative.
1.8.2.4 PARKING FACILITIES
To be provided in clearly defined areas on site.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
1.8.2.5 DRAINAGE
The site should have good drainage and be graded in such a way that water does not pool up during
construction.
1.8.2.6 VEHICLE / HEAVY EQUIPMENT PATHS ON SITE VS PEDESTRIAN PATHS
Pathways for workmen must be clearly marked and distinct from vehicular travel routes on site.
1.8.2.7 SAND
In sand dune areas that might lie adjacent to or around a construction site, consideration should be
given to the movement or build up of sand.
1.8.2.8 FIRE PREVENTION
Suitable fire extinguishers must be readily available on site. The area around fire extinguishers or
hydrants must be kept clear so that they are readily accessible in case of emergency. They must be
regularly inspected and maintained. Site personnel must be trained in the use of fire fighting
equipment.
1.8.2.9 SITE ILLUMINATION
Adequate lighting must be provided in all areas of the job site.
1.8.3 STORAGE AREAS
Storage areas must be adequate for all material and equipment to be stored.
They should not be within 15 meters (50 feet) of permanent or temporary structures.
Storage areas should be clearly marked.
They should have directional signs to facilitate speedy delivery.
1.8.4 WELFARE FACILITIES
Adequate welfare facilities should be provided. The following are minimum requirements to consider,
depending on the size of the workforce..
Canteen or eating area adequate for total work force must be provided. This area shall be clean of
refuse.
Rest area should be provided.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
Adequate toilet and washing facilities should be provided. Toilets should be provided in places where
they may be easily accessible at the rate of one toilet for every fifteen workmen or less. These shall
be maintained in a sanitary condition.
An adequate supply of drinking water must be available. Common drinking cups or dips should be
prohibited.
First aid facilities should be supplied and arrangements made for medical care and for emergency
situations
Where necessary, safe smoking areas should be provided.
1.8.5 GOOD HOUSEKEEPING
The required standard of housekeeping must be established on site and all personnel informed of this
standard. Trash, debris and refuse should be collected daily. All employees shall clean their
respective work areas daily before quitting.
Covered containers, drums, etc., should be provided at various, clearly marked locations throughout
the work site. The containers should be emptied daily at approved rubbish dumps.
1.8.6 CONSTRUCTION SITES AND MATERIALS STORAGE YARDS
The perimeter of the site shall be established with the agreement of the Client
The perimeter fence for construction sites and materials storage yards shall be properly grounded
and of sound construction and design appropriate for the intended protection of the area.
Temporary signs should be erected to route traffic in the safest manner to, from, and within the site.
While not in use all power driven construction equipment must have the ignition locked and key
removed. If there is no lock for the cab and access can be readily made into the engine
compartment, then the machine must be made immobile by disconnecting the battery or by any other
means especially if the equipment is left outside the perimeter. This must be carried out before
leaving the equipment unattended
Crane booms, bulldozer blades, and front end loader buckets on all construction equipment should
be lowered when the equipment is left overnight. For a crane boom where this is not possible, the
boom will be locked off in such a manner that it cannot be dropped or blown over by the wind.
Job site electrical power must be de-energized at night unless required for specific lighting facilities
or used by a night watchman.
Any excavation or obstruction of any kind likely to create a hazard to vehicular traffic at night will be
adequately lit and a sign posted,
All manhole covers will be replaced or the manhole properly barricaded.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
1.9 FIRST AID
First aid is the immediate help that is provided at the site to an injured or seriously ill person before
professional medical help can be obtained.
It is the responsibility of all contractors to ensure that proper first aid is available to their employees
on all job sites.
Provisions shall be made prior to start-up of the project for prompt medical attention in case of
medical emergencies.
1.9.1 PROVISION OF FIRST AID FACILITIES
The first aid facility shall be kept in a sanitary condition at all times. Minimum requirements shall
include the following: a telephone; desk; hot and cold water; wash basin; examining table. air
conditioning; adequate lighting; and dust tight medical supply cabinet.
First aid supplies shall be kept readily available in a cabinet designated for those supplies only.
This cabinet shall be placed under the charge of a first aid attendant, who shall ensure the cabinet is
well stocked at all times.
A suitable type of stretcher must be available on all sites.
A notice should be posted indicating the following:
1. The name of the person who is in charge of the first aid cabinet.
2. The hospital to which any injured person who requires hospital treatment is to be sent.
4. The telephone number of the doctor or first aid attendant
5. The emergency telephone number to be called for assistance.
Personnel on pipeline and power line work or who are working in remote areas shall ensure that one
vehicle is equipped with a well-stocked first aid kit for each crew, and that at least one man in every
crew is trained in first aid. The vehicle shall be marked to indicate that it carries a first aid kit.
A site register should be maintained listing all injuries treated.
1.9.2 FIRST AID ATTENDANTS
When more than 50 persons are employed within a radius of 15 kilometers, first aid facilities run by a
nurse familiar with first aid cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR) requirements and exclusively
assigned to medical duties.
Those persons in charge of first aid supplies on smaller sites with less than 50 workers should be
trained in first aid procedures.
Arrangements should be made to provide air medical evacuations (Medevac) for medical
emergencies with helicopters or fixed wing aircraft.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
1.9.3 FIRST AID FACILITIES AT WORK SITE
On sites or projects where less than fifty workmen are employed, a first aid cabinet
containing bandages, medicines, and disinfectants as follows should be provided:
1. A sufficient number of not less than 12 sterile, small-size finger dressings.

2. A sufficient number of not less than 6 sterile medium-size hand dressings.
3. A sufficient number of not less than 6 sterile large-size hand dressings.
4. A sufficient supply of absorbent cotton wool for packing and firming up splints. Such
supply shall not be less than 200 grams of cotton wool in small 25-gram. packages
and two 500-gram packages.
5. A sufficient number of not less than 12 gauze bandages 7 cm. in width
6. A sufficient number of not less than 12 gauze bandages 11 cm. in width.
7. Not less than 4 yards of adhesive tape in rolls, 1 cm. in width.
8. Not less than 100 grams of Mercurochrome in aqueous solution.
9 Two 1 0-gram. shakers of sulfa powder for sterilization of wounds.
10 100 grams of aromatic ammonia solution in a glass bottle with a glass stopper
11 A medium-sized Thomas'thigh splint, a wooden posterior leg splint, a wooden elbow
splint, a wooden Carr splint for the forearm, a wooden palm splint, and other types of
ready-to-use splints
12 A minimum of 6 triangle bandages
13 A minimum of safety pins
14 Ointment for burns containing a disinfectant and an analgesic
15 A minimum of ten 70 x 70 bandages for burns
16 A pair of scissors with blunt ends
17 A sufficient number of stretchers for moving injured persons
If work is carried out in scattered locations which are more than 300 meters apart, a separate cabinet
shall be provided for every group consisting of more than ten workmen.
On sites or projects where more than fifty workmen are employed, a first aid room should be
provided which meets the following standards.
(a) It shall meet all sanitary specifications.

(b) It shall be conveniently located and readily accessible to injured persons and stretcher-
bearers
(c) Where quick means of transporting for the injured are not available, the said room
shall not be more than 300 meters from the farthest work site.
(d) An adequate number of stretchers shall be available for moving the injured to the first
aid room.
(e) First aid materials and supplies shall be no less than those specified provided that they
are in proportion to the number of workmen.
(f) A nurse should be on duty at all times during working hours.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
1.10 PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT
When a hazardous situation is recognized, steps should be taken to eliminate the hazard by
engineering controls. Should it prove impractical to eliminate the hazard, then personal protective
equipment must be used. When it has been decided that personal protective equipment is required,
steps must be taken to select the proper type of equipment and ensure that the supervisor instructs
his employees in the use and care of that equipment, in accordance with the instructions provided by
the manufacturer.
Hand Tools & Personal Protective Equipment Inspection
 The assigned Storekeeper shall ensure a thorough inspection is carried out of every hand tool
and personal protective equipment before issuing and upon its return by the user. Damaged
items shall be marked "Defective - Do Not Use" and isolated from the rest of the stock.
 Every user/wearer shall thoroughly inspect his tool/personal protective equipment at least daily
and before and after use. Damaged items shall be immediately withdrawn from use and returned
to the stores for necessary repair or replacement
1.10.1 HEAD PROTECTION
Safety hats or helmets are rigid headgear made of materials designed to protect the head from
impact, flying particles, electric shock, etc. Each helmet consists of a shell, a suspension cradle, and
a chin strap.
Employees working in areas where there is danger of head injury from impact; from falling or flying
objects; or from electrical shock and burns, shall be protected by protective helmets as per
European (CE) referenced standards or equivalent.
The suspension cradle gives a helmet its impact distribution qualities. It is therefore essential that it
be properly adjusted to the wearer's head so there is a gap of at least one and a half inches between
the top of the suspension cradle and the helmet shell.
Ancillary equipment such as car muffs, welders shields, etc. can be obtained to fit on helmet shells.
Holes should not be drilled into helmet to facilitate use of such equipment as this can seriously impair
both the mechanical strength and the electrical resistance of the helmet.
Safety hats or helmets shall not be painted.
The complete helmet should be cleaned regularly with soap and water. Helmets should be scrapped
following any penetration, high impact, or subjection to extreme heat.
A safety helmet should be worn by all persons at all times when on a construction job site; in an
operating plant area; or whenever there are overhead hazards
1.10.2 EYE AND FACE PROTECTION
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
Protection of the eyes and face from injury by physical or chemical agents or light radiation, is of
prime importance in an industrial environment. The type of protection selected will depend on the
hazard, but it should be borne in mind that all eye protection and most face protection devices must
be considered as optical instruments. They must be selected, fitted, and used with regard to both the
type of hazard and the optical condition of the user. The wearing of contact lenses is not
recommended in areas where eye protection is required.
1.10.2.1 EYE PROTECTION FROM IMPACT
Factors to be considered in selecting impact resistant eye protection include the degree
of protection required and the comfort provided as required by European (CE) Standard or
equivalent requirements. Four basic types of protection are:
1 Spectacles used for protection against frontal impact. When fitted with side shields,
they afford limited protection against side impact and should not be worn while driving if
they interfere with peripheral vision.
2 Flexible fitting goggles. A flexible frame surrounding the lens gives protection against
flying objects.
3 Cushion fitting goggles. A rigid plastic frame surrounding the lens and a separate
cushioned fitting surface on the facing contact area gives protection against flying
objects.
4 Chipping goggles. Separate rigid plastic eyecups with lens. Designed in two shapes,
one for individuals who do not wear spectacles and one to fit over prescription
spectacles
5 Chemical goggles.
1.10.2.2 EYE PROTECTION FROM RADIANT ENERGIES
In addition to damage from physical and chemical agents, the eyes are vulnerable to
the effects of radiant energy such as that produced during welding. Visible and nonvisible bands of
the light spectrum can produce harmful effects upon the eyes and special attention must be paid to
the selection of eye protection from these hazards.
1.10.2.3 FACE PROTECTION
Face shields protect the face and neck from flying particles, sprays of hazardous
liquids, splashes of molten metal, and hot solutions. Where required, safety spectacles and chemical
goggles shall be worn under the face shield.
1.10.3 HAND PROTECTION
The kind of gloves used depends primarily upon the material or equipment being handled and can be
resistant against one or more of the following: heat, acid, caustic, slipping, wear, fire, oil, sharp
edges, general wear and tear, cold, etc. Gloves should not be used near moving machinery as they
can be caught and trap the hand before it can be withdrawn from the glove.
1.10.4 FOOT PROTECTION
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
Safety footwear is available in many styles, with special soles to resist oil, abrasion, heat, and other
abuses to which the footwear may be subjected. Comfort is particularly important for the wearer, so
safety footwear must fit properly.
Approved safety footwear are sturdy work shoes with leather uppers and/or leather composition with
steel toe caps. Soles and heels are "non"-slip type. Fashion type safety "toe" shoes with canvas,
nylon and/or other soft composition uppers or soles are not considered safety shoes.
1.10.5 HEARING PROTECTION
Increasing attention is being paid to the problem of excessive noise in industry. Noise can be defined
as "any unwanted sound". The intensity of noise is commonly expressed in terms of decibels (dBA)
and measured by a sound level meter. Medical authorities state that continual exposure to noise
levels above 90 dBA for an eight hour day, five day work week may endanger a person's hearing. The
safe period of exposure to a noise level is inversely proportional to the level of the noise.
Hearing loss will result from over-exposure to excessive noise levels. Only after engineering and
mechanical methods of reducing noise levels have been explored, should consideration be given to
providing hearing protection to individual workmen.
There are two types of hearing protection available, the plug type and the cup (or muff) type. The
proper individual fitting of both types of hearing protection is critical as any sound leakage can
seriously impair efficiency of these devices.
1.10.5.1 EAR PLUGS
Ear plugs are placed into the canal of the outer ear. Materials used for these plugs are rubber, plastic,
wax, foam or Swedish wool. Disposable types are preferred as they give good protection and are
very sanitary.
1.10.5.2 EAR MUFFS
Ear muffs cover the external ear to provide an acoustic barrier. The effectiveness of ear muffs varies
considerably due to differences in manufacturer, size, shape, seal material, shell mass, and type of
suspension. Head size and shape can also affect their performance. Liquid or grease filled cushions
between the shell and the head are more effective than plastic or foam-filled types, but they would
present material leakage problems.
The use of hearing protection devices shall be properly evaluated to ensure that the selected devices
give the necessary noise attenuation and protection.
1.10.6 FALL RESTRAINING/ARRESTING DEVICES
There are several types of fall restraining devices used throughout the construction industry. The two
most commonly used ones are the full body safety harness and the safety belt. Harnesses are used
for above ground work, where fall restraining and arresting protection is required. Safety belts are
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
used to restrain the wearer at his place of work. Safety belts should not be used as part of the fall
arrest system.
Full body harnesses are required when working in areas with no guard rails at heights above 1.82
meters (6 feet) or for potential falls of six feet or greater
Special attention should be given to achieve a snug fit of the safety harness as it is easy for a man
to slip through sound but badly adjusted equipment and fall.
No fall restraining or arresting device is any stronger than the point of attachment. Therefore, all
users should be carefully instructed in the importance of a firm anchorage.
Fall restraining/arresting devices must be stored in clean and dry conditions away from sunlight, and
must be thoroughly inspected both on issue and at the start of each shift.
Fall protection devices shall be capable of supporting a minimum dead weight of 2450 kilograms
(5400 pounds).
The maximum length of standard lanyards shall be limited to provide for a fall of no greater than 1.82
meters (6 feet). The lanyard shall have a minimum breaking strength of 2,450 kilograms (5,400
pounds).
All fall arresting/restraining devices and hardware shall be manufactured to European (CE) or
equivalent standards and fully described in the Hazard Identification Plan (HIP), including type, model
and manufacturer,
During all operations conducted from a personnel platform (man basket) at any height above ground
level, fall protection devices (lanyards) shall be secured to an anchorage point or a structural
member located on the basket which can support a minimum dead weight of 2,450 kilograms (5,400
pounds).
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
1.10.7 BASIC PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT
The table below is a list of basic personal protective equipment. Many job classifications may require
additional personal protective equipment depending on the work location, type of job, local hazards,
conditions, etc
Typical Job Classifications Basic Personal Protective Equipment To Be Worn (see key below)
Abrasive blast cleaner 16
Boiler maker 1, 8, 9, 10D, 15B
Carpenter 1, 8, 9, 10C, 15A
Electrician 1, 2, 8, 9, 10B, 15A, or B
Iron worker - structural 1, 8, 9, IOD, 12/13, & 14 A/B, 15A
Lineman 1, 8, 9, 10C, 12/13 & 14 A/B, 15A
Mason 1, 8, 9, 10C/A, 15A
Material Control Man 1, 8, 9, 10C, 15A
Mechanic/Machinist 1, 8, 9, IOC/A, 15A
Painter 17
Pipe fitter 1,8 9, 10 C/D, 15A
Plumber 1, 8: 9, 10C, 15A
Rigger 1,8,9, 10C, 15A
Roof worker 1, 8, 9, 10C, 12/13 & 14 A/B, 15A
Scaffold erector 1, 8, 9, 10C, 13 & 14 A1B, 15A
Sheet metal worker 1,8,9, 10 C/13, 15A
Welder 1 A &B, 4, 8, 9, 10D,/E, 15B
Key To Personal Protective Equipment
1. Safety glasses with side shields (1A=Clear,1B=Shaded)

2. Face shield
3. Goggles, safety impact (3A=Clear, 3B=Shaded)
4. Welding hood and skull guard (Lens shaded to suit work)
5. Respirable air fed hood with filter
6. Respirator, chemical cartridge
7. Respirator dust
8. Safety hat helmet
9. Safety foot wear (9A=shoes, 9B=boots)
10. Gloves. (10A= Rubber coated, 1OB= Rubber molded, 10C General purpose, 1OD=Leather, 1OE=Heat resistant)
11. Ear protection (11 A=Ear plugs, 11 B=Ear muffs)
12. Standard safety belt
13. Full body harness
14. Lanyard 1.82m (6FD). (14A=Standard, 14B=Shock Absorbing)
15. One piece coverall (15A=Standard, 15B=Fire resistant)
16. Sandblaster Hood Equipment
17. Dust filter respirators
Notes: Any worker 1.82 m above ground without the protection of a guard rail system, or in a confined space, shall wear
a full body harness and standard lanyard. Respiratory protection shall be used anytime workers could inhale air
contaminants exceeding permissible exposure limits (PEL), and when an oxygen deficient atmosphere could be
encountered. Breathing quality air shall be supplied to the worker through the use of an air fed hood or self contained
breathing apparatus.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
Protective Goggles, Spectacles, Face Shields And Helmets
Typical Eye Protection Applications
Operation Hazards Protection

Acetylene-welding, cutting Sparks, molten metal, harmful D, E, F
burning rays, flying particles
Electric arc welding Sparks, molten metal, intense I
rays, flying particles
Chemical handling Splash, acid burns, fumes G, H (Severe +C)
Chipping Flying particles A, B, C E, F, G
Furnace operations Glare, heat, molten metal D, E, F
Grinding (light) Flying particles A, B, C, G
Grinding (heavy) Flying particles C, D, E, G
Laboratory Chemical splash, glass G, H (A or B +C)
breakage
Machining Flying particles A, B, C, G
Molten metals Heat, glare, sparks, splash D, E (A o B tinted +C)
Spot welding Flying particles, sparks A, B, C, G
Specialized Hand Protectors
Heat Resistant Gloves
These gloves are made from materials that provide insulation to hot or cold objects. The purpose of
this material is to give the user enough time to perform his task or to stop handling the object before
his hand is injured.
Rubber Molded Gloves
These gloves are made from materials that are resistant to penetration by many chemicals.
Rubber Coated Gloves
Similar to the rubber molded glove in performance. These gloves also have an inner lining that
improves wear ability.
Leather Gloves
These gloves are used to protect the wearer from abrasions. They also provide some resistance to
hot/cold surfaces, but minimal protection from most chemicals.
Welding Gloves
Generally made from leather, these gloves provide the user with protection from hot
sparks/slag during welding. They also provide some heat resistance.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
1.11 RESPIRATORY PROTECTION
Where industrial processes create hazardous atmospheric contaminants, the first consideration
should always be the application of engineering measures to control the contaminants. In those
cases where engineering control measures are not possible, affected personnel must be supplied
with personal respiratory protective equipment.
1.11.1 SELECTION OF EQUIPMENT
A wide variety of respiratory protective equipment is available. As each type is suitable for certain
applications, it is necessary to develop an orderly method for determining the appropriate device to
be employed.
Persons should not be assigned tasks requiring the use of respirators unless it has been
predetermined by medical examination that the worker is physically able to perform the work and use
the apparatus properly.
Each user must receive instructions on the proper use and limitations of the device, as well as
demonstrations and practice in how to fit and wear it. Personnel shall not be placed in a hazardous
environment for which the respirator is not designed, such as a location where there is a lack of
sufficient oxygen.
Consider the following factors when selecting a suitable respiratory protective device:
1 The nature of the hazardous operation or process.
2 The type of air contaminant, including its physical properties, chemical properties,
physiological effects on the body, and its concentration.
3 The period of time for which respiratory protection must be provided.
4 The location of the hazard with respect to a source of uncontaminated respirable air.
5 The state of health of the personnel or users involved.
6 The functional and physical characteristics of the respiratory protective devices.
7 The use of approved respirators only
The Supervisor must know the specific hazards for which a given type of respiratory equipment is
approved. He should not permit respiratory equipment to be used for protection against hazards for
which it was not designed.
1.11.1.1 REQUIREMENTS FOR USE
As with all personal protective equipment, respirators only work if you use them correctly. For face
mask respirators, always make sure that the mask fits properly, that there is a tight seal and no air
leakage. Proper fit is important to prevent contaminants from leaking in. Beards, dentures and facial
bone structure can affect the fit of the respirator. Be sure to wear the right respirator for the hazard.
Always keep the respirator clean and well-maintained. Never alter or modify the respiratory
equipment. Finally, follow manufacturer's specifications for proper cartridge use and established
safety procedures. Do not hesitate to consult your supervisor if there are any questions concerning
your personal respiratory protection.
1.11.1.2 MISUSE
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
Workers sometimes consider respiratory equipment a nuisance, not realizing that failure to wear it
may endanger their lives. This attitude can be changed by education and training. However, as the
risk of injury or death is very real when safety precautions are ignored, any worker refusing to wear
the necessary respiratory equipment will not be allowed to work without it.
Common misuses of respiratory protection equipment include..
a. Using air-purifying (chemical cartridge type) respirators when toxic levels are above the
respirator-rated capacity.
b. Using air-purifying (chemical cartridge type) respirators in oxygen deficient atmospheres.
c. Using incorrect cartridges or filters for the type contaminant and the concentration
encountered
d. Using defective or improperly inspected equipment,
e. Using equipment without having received adequate on training on it.
1.11.1.3 HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES
Protection is required against those hazardous substances which can be inhaled into the respiratory
system, ingested via the digestive tract and absorbed into the skin causing systemic injury to the
human body. Hazardous substances which can enter the body through the respiratory system, the
digestive tract and the skin include, but are not limited to, the following:
 Asbestos
 Creosol (cresylic acid)
 Hydrogen cyanide (hydrocyanic acid)
 Tetraethyl lead and its compounds
 Mercury and its compounds
 Nitroglycerine
 Organic phosphate insecticides
 Solvents
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
1.11.2 RESPIRATORY PROTECTIVE DEVICES
Respiratory protective devices can be classified as follows:
1 Air purifying respirators

2 Supplied air respirators
3 Self-contained breathing devices
1.11.2.1 AIR PURIFYING RESPIRATORS
Gas Masks
The gas mask type of respirator consists of a face piece and filter. No one chemical agent has been
found that will remove all gaseous contaminants, so the canister must be careflilly chosen to fit the
specific need. A canister designed for a specific gas will give longer protection than a canister
designed for a multitude of gases and vapors. Canister gas masks with full face pieces are effective
against higher concentrations of contaminants. However, they do not provide protection against
oxygen deficiency.
Chemical Cartridge Respirators
Chemical cartridge respirators consist of a face piece (usually half mask) connected directly to one
or two small containers of filters/chemicals. The chemicals used are similar to those found in gas
mask canisters, but cartridge respirators are for use only in atmospheres not immediately dangerous
to life or health. An area where the chemical cartridge respirator works very well is in spray painting. It
is critical that the cartridge be matched to the specific application.
Particulate Filter Respirators (Dust Respirators)
A particulate filter respirator protects against the inhalation of nonvolatile particles. The major items to
be considered are:
1 The resistance to breathing offered by the filtering element;

2 the adaptation of the face piece to faces of various sizes and shapes;
3 the fineness of the particles to be filtered out, and their toxicity.
1.11.2.2 SUPPLIED AIR RESPIRATORS
A supplied air respirator permits the user to breathe respirable air while working in a hazardous
atmosphere. Important advantages are simplicity of design, usage under diverse conditions, and
good protection (when properly selected, adequately supplied with respirable air, and used for the
purposes for which they were designed and approved).
Air Line Respirators
The air line respirator is suitable for respiratory protection in atmospheres not immediately hazardous
to life. Equipping the respirator with a small cylinder of compressed air to provide an emergency air
supply qualifies the respirator for use in immediately hazardous atmospheres. It is particularly suited
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
to some types of jobs because it is light and may be worn for long periods of time without appreciable
discomfort. For example, it is often used for spray painting, insecticide spraying, welding, metalizing
and prolonged production work in hazardous areas.
There are two basic types of air line respirators:
1 the continuous flow,

2 the pressure demand flow.
Abrasive Blasting Respirators
Abrasive blasting respirators are used to protect personnel engaged in sand or other abrasive
blasting operations. The requirements for this type of respirator are the same as those for an air line
respirator of the continuous flow type with the addition that mechanical protection from abrasive
particles is needed for the head and neck.
1.12 FIRE PREVENTION
This section covers measures to prevent fires and protect against all their possible harmful effects, in
order to avoid injury to personnel and loss of time and materials.
1.12.1 BEFORE THE JOB STARTS
Construction or projects within an industrial complex requires careful planning since plants and
support facilities being constructed are frequently next to those already in operation. An accident at a
construction site can have serious effects on a nearby oil or gas facility and viceversa, because of a
large amount of fuel present at both locations. The factors which must be considered before the job
starts include site preparation, work permit schedules, types of work permits required and
type/quantity of equipment required on-site.
As part of this process, we must take into account the potential hazards that can be encountered on
site; protection of machinery and equipment; control of ignition sources. storage of flammable and
combustible materials; housekeeping; staff training; and end-of-shift checks. These subjects should
addressed in the Hazards Identification Procedure prior to construction or project start-up.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
1.12.2 LAYOUT
Good layout helps ensure the project can be carried out efficiently. The following principles of project
layout and organization can help minimize fire risks:
Avoid congestion around machinery and equipment where there is a high level of activity and traffic.
Operations having a high fire risk, such as welding and spray painting, should be isolated from
flammable and explosive materials or specially protected.
Be sure to provide adequate emergency access and egress.
Storage of flammable and explosive materials in the plant site should be restricted to minimum
quantities necessary for an uninterrupted cycle of operations, use a larger, secondary storage site
outside the plant area where possible.
1.12.3 EQUIPMENT PROTECTION
Some items of plant equipment need special handling and care after they arrive on site and until they
are commissioned. Examples are computer (and other electronic instrumentation and control gear)
and large pumps and compressors. Such equipment should be covered and protected against
possible damage that could result from its exposure to normal construction activity, dust, paint spray,
etc. Consideration should also be given to protecting it against fire, which could be caused by storing
it near combustible material and against water or other fire fighting agents that might be used to put
out a fire.
1.12.4 CONTROL OF IGNITION SOURCES
Compliance with work permit procedures and conditions protects against possible ignition of oil or
gas from process operations. We must also take steps to prevent ignition of construction materials,
lubricants, and fuels used in the job itself
Electrical equipment should be checked regularly for defects
Smoking is permitted only in designated areas.
Welding equipment, asphalt kettles, heating appliances and other open flames or hot surfaces should
be segregated from combustible materials.
Beware of indirect sources of ignition: hot welding slag dropped from a height for example, or sparks
from a fire under an asphalt kettle are familiar examples of this.
Open fires and/or open burning of materials are strictly prohibited.
Proper bonding and grounding techniques shall be used for any operation where static electricity
could become an ignition source.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
1.12.5 FLAMMABLE LIQUIDS
Flammable liquids are those that can produce a flammable mixture in air at ambient temperature.
This is defined as a fluid (liquid or gas) having a flash point of 55°C (130°F) or lower. Care in handling
flammable fluids is of prime importance.
1.12.5.1 STORAGE
All flammable liquids must be kept in securely capped metal containers or steel drums on which the
contents are clearly marked. Gasoline, acetone, spirits and other volatile liquids with flash points
below 32°C (90°F) should be kept in strong metal lockers located in well-ventilated, non-combustible
huts or sheds. Drums containing flammable fluids shall be provided with proper bung vents.
Flammable storage areas must be securely locked (or fenced), posted with a warning sign "Danger:
Flammable Area" and must be located at least 15 meters (50 feet) away from the nearest building or
storage area for combustibles. No other materials should be stored with flammable liquids.
Flammable gases in cylinders (acetylene, propane, etc.) shall be segregated from other materials,
preferably under an open, well-ventilated sun shade. Oxidizing gases (oxygen, chlorine, nitrous oxide,
etc.) shall be stored separately.
1.12.5.2 HANDLING OF FLAMMABLE LIQUIDS
In handling, the following precautions should be observed.
1 Transportation must always be in (closed) metal containers. (Plastic containers are

prohibited.)
2 Transfer operations should be carried out with funnels and there should be no open
flames within 15 meters (50 feet) of the operation unless conditions warrant greater
clearance
3 Containers are to be grounded and bonded during transfer operations
4 Screw tops and stoppers should be replaced immediately.
5 Any metal container holding flammable liquid must be a FM (or UL) approved type of
safety container.
1.12.5.3 VENTILATION
Gasoline and diesel powered equipment should only be used in well-ventilated areas. Exhaust pipes
should be kept away from combustible materials. Engines must be stopped before refueling takes
place.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
1.12.6 COMBUSTIBLE MATERIALS
Although the main material used in the construction of plants for the petroleum industry is non-
combustible steel or concrete, on a construction site many materials are potential fuel for a fire:
packing material, scaffold planks, form lumber, electrical insulation, tires and other rubber goods,
lubricating oil and grease, and diesel fuel, in addition to the flammable liquids (fuels, paints, solvents)
mentioned above. Therefore, daily site clean up of combustible materials is required to reduce fire
hazards.
1.12.7 HOUSEKEEPING
Rubbish, accumulated at a job site, provides a good starting point for a fire. Waste should be
removed at regular intervals and always at the end of a working day. Metal bins with closefitting lids
should be provided for oily rags, wood shavings, and other highly combustible wastes. Use non-
combustible absorbents to remove spills or leaks of oil. Contents of ash trays should not be mixed
with other waste. Good housekeeping on the site can eliminate many of the situations where a fire can
start.
1.12.8 EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT
We have an obligation to provide and maintain adequate, easily accessible fire extinguishers on the
job site
There are three types of fire extinguishers normally found on construction sites: water, carbon dioxide
and dry chemical types.
Personnel should be aware of the fire fighting equipment available on site and be familiar with its use.
1.12.8.1 WATER-TYPE FIRE EXTINGUISHER
Water extinguishers should be available around sites where there will be Class "A" material, such as
wood, paper, waste material, or packing crates. The typical portable water extinguisher comes in a
9.5 liters (2½gallon) size.
1.12.8.2 CARBON DIOXIDE TYPE EXTINGUISHER
The carbon dioxide (C02) type extinguisher is normally used for controlling electrical
fires. These fires take place in motors, switch-gear, and so forth and are usually very easily
controlled by de-energizing the circuits that supply the power. The advantage of using C02 in this
particular instance is that it leaves no residue in the mechanisms of the electrical equipment and,
therefore, does not further contribute to the damage.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
CAUTION
A C02 extinguisher should never be used in enclosed areas where people are present, because the
gas displaces oxygen from the immediate environment. When the oxygen level in the environment is
reduced sufficiently to put out a fire, the oxygen level is also incapable of supporting human life.
1.12.8.3 DRY CHEMICAL TYPE EXTINGUISHER
A dry chemical type extinguisher is normally used in controlling Class "B" fires in flammable liquids. A
dry chemical extinguisher normally comes in portable 9 kilograms (20 pounds) and 13.6 kilograms
(30 pounds) sizes. A largerwheeled extinguisher of 68 kilograms (150 pounds) and above is
available, but is usually found only within petroleum operating areas.
Some dry chemical extinguishers today have a powder which is good in controlling Class "A", "B",
and "C" fires. This multipurpose ABC powder gives this particular fire extinguisher a good chance of
controlling any type of fire involving a wood, a petroleum liquid, or electrical equipment.
1.12.8.4 PRESSURIZED WATER
Since most fires at construction sites involve Class "A" materials, they can be fought with water.
1.12.8.5 KNOW YOUR FIRE EXTINGUISHER
Water Type Stored Carbon Dioxide C02 Multi-Purpose ABC

Pressure Dry Chemical
Stored Pressure Cartridge Operated
CLASS A FIRES YES NO YES
Ordinary Combustibles
Wood, paper, trash
CLASS B FIRES NO YES YES
Flammable Liquids and
Gases
Gasoline, oil, paints,
grease, etc.
CLASS C FIRES NO YES YES

Energized electrical
equipment
RANGE 30' - 40' 3' - 8' 5' - 20'
1.12.9 REPORTING A FIRE
Every fire, including those extinguished by Bonatti personnel, should be reported to the Client
representative.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
1.12.10 END-OF-SHIFT CHECKS
A routine inspection should be made at the end of the working day to see that everything is left in a
safe condition. The following itemized checklist shall be followed:
 Clean-up and removal of rubbish and waste materials.

 Switch off electrical equipment at the mains. Separate circuits should be provided for security
lights and other equipment that has to be left turned on.
 Cover valuable equipment to protect it against dirt and against the effects of water that might be
used in an emergency.
 Make a special check of smoking areas, hot equipment, welding areas, etc. to be sure there is no
possibility of delayed ignition resulting in a fire.
 Return flammable liquids and gas cylinders to designated storage areas,
1.12.11 MAINTENANCE AND RECORDING
Maintenance should comprise of a annual check:
1. Check extinguisher is in correct location, access is unobstructed and extinguisher is clearly

visible.
2. Check contents gauges, where fitted, indicate extinguisher is serviceable.
3. Check for signs of leakage, corrosion, or physical damage.
4. Check seals are unbroken and up to date inspection tag is fitted. Annual inspections will be
documented. Copies of this documentation will be kept on file by the Bonatti Site Manager.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
1.13 TRANSPORTATION
This section outlines the procedures and responsibilities for preventing motor vehicle accidents. In
addition, it sets the standards for driver performance, responsibility, and vehicle maintenance
expected of all Bonatti drivers. All drivers are expected to drive in a defensive manner and maintain
control of their vehicles at all times.
1.13.1 DRIVER REQUIREMENTS
Only qualified personnel must be employed as drivers of motor vehicles. It is the responsibility of the
driver's supervisor, foreman, or superintendent to verify the driver's credentials prior to his
employment. It is a Company rule, that each person driving a motor vehicle must possess and have
on his person a valid driver's license.
1.13.2 DRIVER'S RESPONSIBILITIES
It is the responsibility of the driver to ensure that his vehicle is safe to operate.
It is the responsibility of each driver to take his vehicle to the proper facility for servicing and repairs
when they are required or scheduled.
The driver of the vehicle is fully responsible and accountable for the mechanical and physical
condition of the vehicle. He must report any damage, beyond normal wear and tear, immediately.
The driver is responsible for transporting materials properly and ensuring that a load does not exceed
the manufacturer's design load capacity. All loads must be properly secured and tied down. Materials
should not extend over the sides of the truck. Loads extending beyond the front or rear shall be
marked with a red flag. Also such loads must be equipped with visible brake and tail lights at their
rear end points.
Tyres which have breaks in the casing, or with exposed fabric, shall not be used.
Sand tires present a hazard if used on vehicles which are operated at excessive speed especially
when they are not properly inflated.
Drivers shall not transport unauthorized persons in Company vehicles. The driver's supervisor shall
authorize all passengers in the vehicle.
The driver and all passengers of a Company vehicle shall wear seat belts at all times while the
vehicle is in motion.
Drivers have full authority to refuse to transport any passenger who refuses to use seat belts.
Conversely, passengers may refuse to ride with a driver who refuses to wear his seat belt.
Passengers shall not be transported in the rear of pickups or on truck beds.
Drivers should not transport more passengers than the number of seat belts provided in the vehicle.
All drivers shall be familiar with what the Company considers unsafe driving practices and avoid them
at all times.
The driver must not exceed the posted speed limit. This is the maximum speed allowed in a certain
areas. Every driver is expected to reduce his vehicle's speed under hazardous weather or road
conditions
All vehicles shall be parked correctly and/or in designated parking areas. Parked vehicles shall not
obstruct other vehicles, roadways, accessways or fire hydrants.
1.13.3 VEHICLE CONDITION
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
It is the responsibility of the driver to ensure his vehicle is safe to operate. It is the responsibility of the
driver to bring the vehicle in for scheduled maintenance. The driver is
responsible for inspecting a vehicle before operating it to determine if the following items
have been provided and are in satisfactory condition:
Vehicle Inspection Checklist:
1. The vehicle number, company name, current inspection stickers and license plate (front
and back) must be in place.
2. Seat belts are mandatory for all vehicle occupants
3. Two reflective warning triangles should be in each vehicle
4. Windows and windshield must be clean and free of cracks or damage. The glass must
be in good condition. The windows must open and close properly.
5. All lights (high and low beam headlights, tail lights, dash lights, stop lights, turn signal
lights, and the rear license plate light) must be in working order. When fog lights (front &
rear) and clearance lights have been provided, they must be also be in good working
order.
6. All brakes (foot and hand brakes) must be in good working order. Check the foot and
hand brake mechanism for correct operation.
7. The automatic transmission must be in good operating condition and should shift into
the parking position correctly.
8. Springs and shock absorbers must be in good condition with no alignment or control
problems
9. There should be no excessive movement of the steering wheel and no signs of

damage. Steering knobs and loose coverings are prohibited
10. Tires should have no breaks in the tire casing or exposed fabric and must be inflated to
correct air pressure. If the treads show any signs of wear like bare patches, this could
indicate defective steering, springs and/or shock absorbers.
11. Check the wheels for rim damage. Make sure the wheels are not buckled or out of
alignment and wheel lug nuts are in place and secure on the rim.
12. If the vehicle is fitted with a trailer, the coupling must be intact and working correctly.
The trailer should have safety coupling chains, rear brake lights, turn signals, tall lights
and rear license plate lights.
13. Make sure that the inside and outside rear view mirrors are clean, adjusted, secured
and undamaged.
14. Check that the windshield wiper blades are in good condition, and operate properly.
Inspect the rear window wiper, if fitted. The windshield washer should work properly and
there should be water in the washer container.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
15. The speedometer should be in good working order.
16. Test the exhaust system by starting up the engine of the vehicle, listening for sounds
and spotting any leaks associated with it. Check to see if the tail pipe extends at least
three inches from the body of the vehicle. The tail pipe emissions should be released
from a point where they do not directly come into contact with the driver of the
vehicle or its occupants, thereby causing any adverse health affects to any of them.
17. A properly inflated spare tire with a jack and tire wrench must be provided. The tire
wrench should be the correct size to fit the wheel nuts of the vehicle.
18. Check the following fluids for leaks and proper levels, especially in hot or cold weather:
 Radiator coolant
 Oil
 Brake fluid
 Transmission oil (checked with engine running)
 Distilled water for the battery
NOTE: The driver should check the radiator coolant level only when the engine is
cool. Fluid should be added to the level mark on the overflow expansion tank
only if provided.
19 The vehicle's horn must be operational.
20. Note all damage on the vehicle, process the proper reports and have the damage
repaired.
Each driver must conduct a vehicle inspection whenever taking charge of a vehicle and
periodically thereafter (at least once a month) to ensure that all systems are operating properly
and there is no damage.
Passengers will be carried only in the passenger compartment of a vehicle. All vehicle
occupants must wear seat belts.
Drivers shall insist that all passengers wear seat belts before starting the vehicle..
Loose materials are to be kept out of the driving compartment. Do not place materials (hard
hats, etc.) on rear window shelf
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
1.13.4 EMERGENCIES
When reporting any accident, make sure the message is understood before hanging up.
1.13.4.1 REMAIN AT SCENE
A driver shall not leave the scene of an accident or move his vehicle after an accident unless he
needs to take an injured person to a hospital. If a damaged vehicle is blocking traffic or is stopped on
the highway, reflective triangles must be used to warn approaching traffic of the vehicle's presence.
1.13.5 PASSENGER SEATING AND SEAT BELTS
Passengers shall be transported only in passenger compartments of cars, trucks and buses
The number of passengers being transported in the passenger compartment of a vehicle must
not exceed the manufacturer's specifications.
Seat belts shall be worn by the driver and passengers in all vehicles except buses with more
than 14 seats, where seat belts are only required for drivers.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
1.13.6 DESERT DRIVING
Where ever possible vehicles should be equipped with radios.
Before setting out any journey.
 Inform arriving location of journey + ETA

 Inform departing location of journey + ETA
 Know your route, total distance to be travelled, signs to look out for on the way (following
a pipeline, route marked by old tires, barrels etc)
 Know the compass bearing to be followed
Any person who drives in the desert shall ensure that:
 His immediate supervisor knows his destination and route.

 His vehicle is in good condition with adequate fuel, oil, and water.
 His vehicle has tools, equipment, and spares for emergency use.
 He has sufficient food and drinking water to sustain him until rescue, should he be
stranded.
 He is familiar with survival and rescue techniques and procedures.
Try to avoid driving at all in poor visibility conditions. It could be very dangerous as you could hit an
obstacle or drive over the slip face of a sand dune.
Don't deviate from your stated route.
Use trails when and where possible. Avoid short cuts over difficult terrain.
If caught in a sudden sand storm your best policy may well be to stop and wait for it to subside. This
could mean a few extra hours in your journey, but is much better than becoming lost or having an
accident.
Avoid driving long trips at midday in the summer. It is extremely hot and you may also have engine
overheating problems. The best time to travel is early morning as the sand is still cool and may have
some moisture from the dew.
If lost in the desert, stop and stay with the vehicle. Park on high ground. Do not continue to drive for a
long distance when you are certain you have lost your way. Searchers can find you sooner if you are
not far of your planned route.
1.13.6.1 SURVIVAL
A person lost or stranded in the desert must stay with the vehicle as it provides shelter and to make it
easier for searchers to locate him.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
1.13.6.2 SAND TYRES
Sand tyres are hazardous to use when they are not properly inflated, when they are driven at high
speeds or when the roads are wet. It is the driver's responsibility to ensure the following requirements
are met for sand tires:
Vehicle Type Tyre Size Tyre Pressure

MIN MAX
Pickup, 4x4 7.50x16 1.2 2.2
Utility, 4x4 Hilux 2.05x16 1.5 2.2
Truck, 4x4 12.00x20 3.0 6.5
Dumper and Truck, 6x6 14.00x20 3.0 6.55
Maximum speed for sand tires (on hard dry road):
 70 KPH at maximum sand tire pressure

 20 KPH at minimum sand tire pressure
Since sand tires have a larger diameter than standard tires, speedometer readings will not be
accurate. Unless the vehicle speedometer has been corrected to account for the oversize tires, the
driver should remember that he is traveling approximately 10-15% faster than the speedometer
reading.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
1.14 WINTER WORK RULES
1.14.1 GENERAL SAFETY STATEMENT
All site personnel shall attend a safety meeting prior to commencement of operations. This will be
carried out at all pertinent locations of the work activities. Under no circumstances will unauthorized
personnel be allowed to work in or around the site construction areas without pre-authorized
clearance.
The authorized personnel will be identified prior to commencement of operations and will sign in
during the prejob safety meeting. Two way communication between the operations center,
safety /security patrols and all personnel involved, will be set up and shall be maintained for the
duration of operations. Confirmation shall be sought to confirm that warning signs have been erected
at all access points to site area and public access points. Company authorized representatives shall
confirm that a permanent patrol of all public crossings for the duration of the construction operations
has been initiated.
The Company will ensure that all workers employed are adequately equipped with safety equipment,
clothing and training for the execution of safe winter work operations.
Winter work safety and environmental guidelines shall be addressed in the safety and environmental
systems manual sections.
The on-site supervisor and the Company Authorized Representatives shall be responsible for
ensuring that all operations are carried out in accordance with this procedure. Any deviations to this
document shall be compiled and approved on-site in the form of bridging documents prior to
commencement of operations.
Safety is the responsibility of everyone from Manager to onshore operators. It is the responsibility of
everyone to ensure his or her work place is safe. Safety is of paramount importance, and no
procedure will be adopted which violates this concept.
Common sense safety rules will be adhered to at all times. Particular attention will be given to on-site
procedures, local codes and practices. Job specific safety rules shall be presented in a separate
procedure for each section.
The following shall be adhered to at all times:
1. Help prevent accidents and injury before they occur. Stay alert at all times. Watch
for situations, which may cause or lead to an accident or injury to you and others.
2. Report all unsafe conditions, tools, equipment and practices to your supervisor in
order that the dangers may be rectified preventing accidents occurring.
3. Practical jokes, horseplay, drinking of alcoholic beverages and use of drugs are
prohibited at the work place.
4. No one shall remove, displace, damage or destroy any safety or operating equipment
furnished for use on the job, nor interfere with its use.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
5. If required any work permits will be obtained prior to starting pigging for pneumatic
testing operations. Permit to work procedures shall be strictly adhered to.
6. Don't run except in extreme emergencies. Watch where you walk and keep alert to the
movement of equipment and other persons around your worksite.
7. All employees shall maintain an orderly work area.
8. All employees must use protective clothing and equipment provided for their use.
9. Hard hats, protective boots overalls and safety glasses shall be the minimum
safety clothing worn at all times when on site. A specification shall be applied to
clothing worn during the winter work program ensuring that the insulating value of
the clothing used will prevent hypothermia and frost bite to exposed skin.
10. Only authorized / trained personnel will be allowed to operate plant and power tools.
11. All employees shall inspect their work areas at the end of each shift and ensure that all
air; water, diesel and electrical supplies are cut off at the supply unless otherwise
instructed.
12. No person shall stand under loads handled by power operated equipment.
13. All personnel shall be aware of emergency procedures and will attend all on-site safety
meetings as required.
14. On no account shall any work take place on a vessel, pipeline or fitting when the item is
under the strength test. Should remedial work be required, the system will be isolated
and de-pressurised prior to remedial works being carried out.
1.14.2 ON-SITE SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS

1.14.2.1 EXPOSURE TO COLD TEMPERATURES
One of the hazards associated with winter work air is exposure to cold temperatures and the
handling of metal products which when handled with inadequate protective clothing can cause severe
skin burns.
At its extremely low temperature, pipe and exposed metal surfaces can produce an effect on the skin
similar to a burn.
Never allow any exposed part of your body to touch un-insulated pipes or vessels at low temperature
without adequate protective clothing; the extremely cold material may stick fast and tear the flesh
when you attempt to withdraw it. Even non-metallic materials are dangerous to touch at low
temperatures. In addition to the hazards of frost bite or flesh sticking to cold materials, objects that
are soft and pliable at room temperature, such as rubber or plastics, are easily broken because they
become hard and brittle at these extremely low temperatures. Carbon steels become brittle at low
temperatures and may easily fracture when stressed.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
1.14.3 PERSONNEL PROTECTION AND FIRST AID

1.14.3.1 PERSONNEL EQUIPMENT
Personnel should be thoroughly familiar with the properties and safety considerations when working
in cold environments. Loose fitting gloves of impermeable material should be worn when handling
anything that comes in contact with cold pipework and vapor or whenever the possibility of exposure
to cold pipework exists.
1.14.3.2 FIRST AID
Tissue contact with cold surfaces may result in damage similar to that associated with thermal
burns, severe deep freezing with extensive destruction of tissue. Those areas effected should be
flushed directly with large volumes of tepid water to reduce freezing. Loosen any clothing, which may
restrict circulation. Do not apply heat. Protect affected area with a sterile protective dressing, or with
clean sheets, if area is large and protect area from further injury. Seek medical attention promptly.
1.14.3.3 NOTE TO PHYSICIAN
Frozen tissues should be treated promptly by immersion in a water bath at a temperature between
104 - 113F (40 - 45C). Avoid the use of dry heat.
Frozen tissues are painless and appear waxy with a pallid yellow color. Tissues become painful and
edematous upon thawing and the pale color turns to pink or red as blood circulation is restored.
Potent analgesics are often indicated. Tissues, which have been frozen, show severe widespread
cellular injury and are highly susceptible to infections and additional trauma. Therefore, rapid
warming of tissues in the field is not recommenced if transportation to a medical facility will be
delayed. If body temperature is depressed, the patient must be warmed gradually. Shock may occur
during the correction of hypothermia. Cardiac dysrhythmias may be associated with severe
hypothermia.
1.14.3.4 ENVIRONMENTAL CONSIDERATIONS FOR WINTER CONSTRUCTION.
The contractor in performing the winter work program shall adhere to all the environemtal
regulations as set forth in the contract documentation.
Special considerations shall be applied for as it pertains to the winter work program such as
removal of topsoil’s over the trench line area and an exclusion of topsoil removal in agricultural
areas along the working side.
In areas that require grade cuts in agricultural areas that have been identifies as areas that
require topsoil conservation, Company authorized representatives shall direct the contractors
topsoil ripping and stripping operations.
Disposal of non merchantable timber using the burn pile method, shall be applied for in
advance of the clearing and grubbing operations
Special crossing areas such as environmentally sensitive watercourses shall be reviewed in advance of the winter
construction schedule, to determine the appropriate crossing window schedules and special restrictions.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
1.15 WORK PERMIT SYSTEM
The Work Permit System incorporates procedures commonly used in industrial facilities to ensure
that necessary communication takes place and hazards are controlled.
Restricted areas are potentially hazardous. However, knowledgeable people using proper procedures
can perform work tasks efficiently and safely. The work permit procedure is important in maintaining
a safe work environment and is a requirement for all jobs in restricted areas.
1.15.1 RESTRICTED AREAS
Restricted areas are those areas or activities which have been designated by department managers
as requiring the work permit system. These include (but are not limited to) all areas where
hydrocarbons, flammable liquids or gases, or oxidizing agents are handled, stored, piped, or
processed in significant quantities; and critical non-hydrocarbon operations.
The following are examples of restricted areas: petroleum processing plants; pump stations; tank
farms; loading piers; hydrocarbon pipelines; oil wells; gas plants.) specified locations on marine
vessels; gasoline service stations; areas where explosives and industrial X-ray or radioactive
materials are used or stored,- work areas under or near power lines; confined space entry; and
material supply storage areas.
1.15.2 PRECAUTIONS
1.15.2.1 CHECKLIST
Each permit will contain a checklist of precautions against common hazards. Such a list cannot
include precautions against all hazards. It is the duty of both the issuer and the receiver to review the
job, anticipate what hazards might arise, check for flammable gases in the area and see that proper
precautions have been specified on the permit before it is signed.
1.15.2.2 CLEAR AREA
One specific precaution applying to all work is to clear the area of people not required for the job to
avoid their being exposed to unnecessary hazards. If people enter an area where they could be
exposed to undue danger, the work should be stopped until they are cleared from the area.
1.15.2.3 WORK STOPPAGE
If conditions change or become unsafe during the course of work, the local supervisor may stop the
work and cancel the permit.
The permit receiver has the responsibility to stop the work and advise the issuer or supervisor any
time he feels the safety of the job does not meet the conditions of the work permit.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
1.15.3 HANDLING OF ISSUED WORK PERMIT
A work permit is normally valid for only one shift, but it may be extended for one additional shift with
proper approval.
The receiver of the work permit must keep the permit posted at the job location at all times.
The receiver of a work permit must keep a copy in his possession or within view of the job site for the
duration of the job, so that it may be presented upon request.
If the receiver leaves the job site, he shall give the permit to a responsible senior crew member to
keep until he returns.
1.15.4 CLOSING OUT THE PERMIT
When the job is completed or at the end of the shift, each work permit must be closed out by both
issuer and receiver. The only exception shall be when the distance and remoteness make signing
impractical, and it is so stated when the work permit is issued.
1.15.5 HOLD TAGS AND MULTIPLE LOCKOUTS
The purpose for the Lockout System is to render controllers inoperative, i.e., circuit breakers,
disconnect switches, valves, etc. on any systems (electrical, steam, hydrocarbon, water, acid, etc.),
where the operation of the control device could be hazardous to personnel working on the system.
Hold tags and locks are primarily intended to protect the individual doing the work from being injured
by an inadvertent start-up.
Work permit issuers and operations supervisors shall ensure that hold tags and lock outs are used
and so noted on the work permit. The use of hold tags/lock outs shall be strictly enforced.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
1.15.6 RULES ON WORK PERMIT PROCEDURE
1) Issuer and receiver must inspect job site together before signing the work permit
2) Issue the correct permits for the job. Two or more permits may be required for the job.
3) Gas Test and/or H2S gas test and/or oxygen analysis test must be made before issuing
work permit.
4) Job description and equipment used must be clearly stated on the work permit. Be
specific, issue permits for a single pump, drum, etc.
5) All tick boxes must be correctly filled in and gas readings indicated.
6) Proper lockouts, hold tags, and blinds must be used where applicable (multiple clips
with lock, and/or chains with padlocks).
7) Work permits should be issued for the specific period of time required to complete the
job.
8) To extend time work permit beyond one shift, the oncoming shift issuer must inspect job
site, write in extended time and sign permit.
9) Special precautions such as requirements for fire watch, Scott air packs, life lines,
barricades, etc. must be written on the permit.
10) The work permit must remain on the job site in a conspicuously visible place while work
is going on. If an emergency develops, the permit must be withdrawn immediately and
all work stopped without questions.
11) The work permit must be closed out after a job is completed. Issuer and receiver must
inspect the job site and sign off the work permit.
1.15.7 LOCK OUT AND TAG
Workers may be injured while working on equipment when the controls have not been locked
and tagged in the off position. People do make mistakes and start equipment on which maintenance
men are working; vibrations and ineffective mechanisms can cause controls to move or valves to
open. Protection is simple: lock the control in the off position and prevent an accident.
When more than one man is going to work on a system or on a number of pieces of equipment
within the system, the multiple lockout clip enables each man to lock out the circuit or machine
control. If your man can't get his lock on the clip, work should not proceed until a suitable clip is
found.
Tags are useful to tell who is working on the equipment and who authorized the shutdown.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
2. PART 2 - GENERAL AND CIVIL
2.1 EXCAVATIONS, TRENCHING AND SHORING
Accidents due to cave-in can occur for excavations which are not shored or otherwise supported.
Even rock that looks solid from a cursory inspection can collapse without warning. The sides of an
excavation may need to be suitably shored, benched or sloped back to a safe angle of repose, depth,
and soil composition.
Other types of excavation accidents are caused by contact with underground pipes and cables, by
falls of equipment and persons, by persons being struck by excavating equipment, and by hazardous
atmospheres.
DEFINITIONS:
1. Excavation
Any man-made cavity or depression in the earth's surface, including its sides, walls, or faces, formed
by earth removal and producing unsupported earth conditions by reason of the excavation.
2. Trench Excavation
A narrow excavation made below the surface of the ground. In general, the depth is greater than the
width, but the width of a trench is not greater than 4.5 meters (15 feet).
3. Protective Systems
Methods used to protect employees from cave-ins, from materials that could fall or roll Into the
excavation onto the workers or from collapse of adjacent structures. Protective systems include
supports, sloping and benching, shields and other means to protect workers.
4. Shoring
Hydraulic, timber or mechanical systems that support the sides of an excavation, designed to prevent
cave-ins.
5. Hydraulic Shoring
A pre-engineered support system of aluminum hydraulic cylinders (cross-braces) used with
vertical rods (uprights) or horizontal rods designed specifically to support side walls of an
excavation to prevent cave-in.
6. Benching
A method of protecting employees from cave-ins by excavating the sides of an excavation to form
one or a series of horizontal steps, with a vertical rise between steps.
7. Sloping
A method of excavating in which the sides of an excavation are laid back to a safe angle to prevent
cave-ins. (The safe angle required varies with different types of soil, exposure to the elements and
superimposed loads. There is no single angle of repose. Soil classification must be identified to
select safe sloping and benching methods.)
8. Soil Classification System
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
A method of categorizing soil and rock deposits as types A, B, and C in decreasing order of stability.
Soil type is determined by analysis of the soil's properties and how it performs under exposure to the
elements and superimposed loads.
Type A:
Cohesive soils with an unconfined compressive strength of 1.5 ton per square foot (tc)
(144kPa) or greater are classified as Type A. Examples of cohesive soils are: clay, silty clay,
sandy clay, clay loam and in some cases, silty clay loam and sandy clay loam. Cemented
soils such as caliche and hardpan are also considered Type A. However, no soil is Type A if
one or more of the following conditions are true:
(i) The soil is fissured.

(ii) The soil is subject to vibration from heavy traffic, pile driving, or similar effects.
(iii) The soil has been previously disturbed.
(iv) The soil is part of a sloped, layered system where the layers dip into the excavation on a
slope of four horizontal to one vertical (4H: 1 V) or greater.
(v) The material is subject to other factors that would require it to be classified as a less
stable material.
Type B:
Soils classified as Type B are:

(i) Cohesive soils with an unconfined compressive strength greater than 0.5 tsf (48 kPa)
but less than 1. 5 tsf (144 kPa).
(ii) Granular cohesionless soils including angular gravel (similar to crushed rock), silt, silt
loam, sandy loam and, in some cases, silty clay loam and sandy loam clay.
(iii) Previously disturbed soils except those which would otherwise be classed as Type C
soil.
(iv) Soil that meets the unconfined compressive strength or cementation requirements for
Type A, but is fissured or subject to vibration.
(v) Dry rock that is not stable.
(vi) Material that is part of a sloped, layered system where the layers dip into the
excavation on a slope less steep than four horizontal to one vertical (4H: 1V) but only
if the material would otherwise be classified as Type B.
Type C:
Soils classified as'Type C are:

(i) Cohesive soils with an unconfined compressive strength of 0.5 tsf (48 kPa) or less.
(ii) Granular soils including gravel, and loamy sand.
(iii) Submerged soil or soil from which water is freely seeping.
(iv) Submerged rock that is not stable.
(v) Material in a sloped layered system where the layers dip into the excavation or a slope
of four horizontal to one vertical (4H: 1 V).
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
10. Trench Boxes:

A structure that is able to withstand the forces imposed on it by cave-ins, and in the process,
protects employees inside the structure. (Plans for trench boxes are to be submitted to Loss
Prevention.)
2.1.1 BEFORE WORK STARTS
In order to begin excavation work with minimum risk to men, plant and equipment and to
enable the work to proceed without interruption, the following factors must be considered
well before the job starts:
1) Size and purpose of the excavation.

2) Nature of the ground including the proximity of made-up ground.
3) Stability of adjacent structures.
4) Position of underground obstructions such as pipes, electric cables, and other utilities
5) Weather and soil moisture conditions, especially high water table.
6) Sources of soil vibrations (highway traffic, railroads, machinery, etc).
7) Adjacent roads and footpaths.
8) Method of excavation.
Consideration of these factors will indicate the safety measures which must be implemented to
proceed with the job and whether the sides of the excavation can be sloped and benched to a safe
angle or whether other protective systems will be required. It is important to provide adequate and
suitable protective systems for use whenever excavation work is to be carried out to a depth of 1. 5
meters (5 feet) or more. Excavation work to a depth of less than 1. 5 meters (5 feet) may also require
protective systems.
2.1.2 WORK PERMIT
Work permits must be obtained from the appropriate operations supervisor before excavation work is
started, including residential areas and roadways, and in any place where the presence of
underground/utility obstructions is known or suspected
2.1.3 UNDERGROUND OBSTRUCTIONS
Whenever the presence of underground pipes, cables, vessels, or structures is known or suspected,
mechanical excavators shall not be used until all such obstructions have been exposed by hand
digging. Mechanical excavators shall not be used within 3 meters (10 feet) of any such obstruction.
Pneumatic breakers shall only be used where necessary to break concrete or other hard surfaces.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
2.1.4 GENERAL PRECAUTIONS
2.1.4.1 SHORING PROTECTIVE SYSTEMS
As soon as an excavation reaches a depth of 1.2 meters (4 feet) or soil banks are greater than 1.5
meters (5 feet), suitable shoring shall be installed or the sides sloped back to a safe angle. Shoring
may be of timber or any other suitable material, such as steel sheet piling.
The determination of the angle of slopes, benches, or the choice and design of other protective
systems shall be based on evaluation of pertinent factors such as: type of soil (Type A, B, or C),
depth of cut; possible variations in water content of the material while the excavation is open.
anticipated changes in materials from exposure to air, sun, or water; loading imposed by structures,
equipment, overlying material, or stored material; and vibrations from equipment, blasting, traffic, or
other sources.
Excavations shall not be sloped at an angle greater than one and one-half horizontal to one vertical
(34° measured from the horizontal).
Shoring systems shall be designed by a qualified person and meet accepted engineering
requirements. Materials used shall be in good serviceable condition, and timbers shall be sound, free
from large or loose knots, and of proper dimensions.
2.1.4.2 PERSONNEL PROTECTION
Portable trench boxes or sliding trench shields may be used for the protection of personnel in lieu of a
shoring system or sloping.
Trench boxes shall be designed, constructed and maintained to provide protection equal to or greater
than the sheeting or shoring required.
Shields shall be installed in a manner to restrict lateral or other movement of the shield and be
capable of withstanding any sudden application of lateral loads.
Shields shall be extended above the excavation to protect employees working inside the shields and
when entering or exiting the areas protected by shields.
Employees shall not be allowed inside the shielded areas whenever shields are being installed,
removed or moved.
2.1.4.3 INSPECTION
All parts of an excavation, including the shoring, shall be inspected every day by a competent person
to ensure that there is no danger of collapse.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
2.1.4.4 CLEARANCE
In order to provide a safe footing at the edge, and to prevent spoil falling into an excavation, a clear
space at least 0.6 meter (2 feet) wide shall be maintained on all sides
2.1.4.5 MECHANICAL EXCAVATOR
Men shall not be permitted to work underneath loads or in places where they could be struck by any
part of a mechanical excavator.
2.1.4.6 WALKWAYS
Where employees, equipment, or members of the public are required or permitted to cross over an
excavation, a close planked bridge or walkway with standard guard rails shall be provided and kept
clear of excavated materials or other tripping hazards. No sidewalk shall be undermined unless
properly shored.
2.1.5 ACCESS AND EGRESS
Safe means of getting into and out of an excavation shall be provided at intervals not
exceeding 7.5 meters (25 feet). Ladders shall be placed at an angle of 75°, and extend at least 0.9
meter (3 feet) above the stepping-off point. Ladders shall be securely fixed.
2.1.6 HAZARDOUS ATMOSPHERES AND MATERIALS
2.1.6.1 VENTILATION
Where there is reason to suspect oxygen deficiency or the presence of a hazardous atmosphere in
an excavation, gas tests must be carried out by a qualified person. Where necessary, mechanical
ventilation shall be used, or other appropriate precautions shall be taken before men enter.
Note: Toxic, oxygen and flammable gas tests are to be conducted before entering hazardous
excavations in Restricted Areas.
Hazardous Atmospheres
Prior to entry into excavations greater than four feet deep, or confined spaces, a work permit shall be
issued. Gas tests shall verify that the oxygen level is 20-21%, combustible gases 0.0 LEL, and H2S
is 0 PPm
2.1.6.2 EXHAUST GASES
Where an internal combustion engine is used in an excavation, special precautions must be taken to
ensure that exhaust gases are discharged so as not to be a hazard to men working in the excavation.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
2.1.7 EDGE PROTECTION, MARKERS AND FIXED LIGHTING
Whenever it is necessary to place or operate power shovels, derricks, trucks, materials, soil banks
or other heavy objects on a level above and near an excavation, the side of the excavation shall be
sheet-piled, shored, and braced as necessary to resist the extra pressure due to such superimposed
loads. When mobile equipment is utilized or allowed adjacent to excavations, substantial stop logs or
barricades shall be installed. If possible, the grade should be away from the excavation. If men or
vehicles are in the vicinity after dark, fixed warning lights shall be used to mark the limits of the work.
2.1.8 BACKFILLING
Backfilling and removal of trench supports shall be accomplished first by backfilling up to a level
allowing for the removal of the lower braces. Another layer of backfill shall be positioned in the trench
to the next layer of braces to be removed. Removal of trench supports shall progress together with
the backfill from the bottom of the trench. In unstable soil, ropes shall be used to pull out the jacks or
braces from above after employees have cleared the trench. All excavations shall be backfilled and
consolidated, and the surface shall be left in good condition as soon as is practicable.
2.1.9 HYDRAULIC SHORING FOR TRENCHES
Hydraulic shoring is provided as a method of protection against cave-ins in trenches that do not
exceed 20 feet (6.1 m) in depth.
2.1.10 TIMBER SHORING FOR TRENCHES
Timber shoring is provided as a method of protection from cave-ins in trenches that do not exceed 20
feet (6. 1 m) in depth.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
2.2 DEMOLITION
Numerous factors must be taken into account before the method of demolition is decided. Of prime
importance are the age of the structure, the method of construction, the state of preservation, its
previous use, and the surrounding environment. These factors must be known before any planning
can begin.
Many problems are peculiar to the demolition of tanks, vessels, and ancillary pipe work associated
with the oil industry. For instance, many serious accidents have resulted when due consideration
was not given to the cleaning and gas-freeing of this equipment before work began.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
2.2.1 ORIGINAL DRAWINGS
The original drawings of the structure to be demolished should be obtained. An examination of them
should be made to ascertain whether any major changes from the original construction have been
made and where utility connections may be found.
2.2.1.1 DISCONNECTIONS
All utility services such as electricity, gas, and water must be shut off and the main supplies
disconnected outside the line of the demolition work. Tanks, vessels, and pipingwork must be
completely disconnected from inlet, outlet, and overflow points.
2.2.1.2 ADJACENT STRUCTURES AND PUBLIC AREAS
Adjacent structures, public buildings, pedestrian walkways, parking lots, etc. shall be protected from
demolition debris that can likely cause hazards to the general public. Also, bracing must be installed
to insure stability of adjacent structures.
2.2.1.3 BARRICADES/SIGNS
Barricades must be erected around the work area. Signs bearing the words "Danger -Demolition in
Progress" must be erected at each approach to the barricade.
2.2.2 METHOD OF DEMOLITION
It should be remembered that the safest and most efficient method is to start at the top and dismantle
in the reverse order of construction. There are, however, cases where such a method is impractical
or uneconomical and where other methods have to be considered.
2.2.2.1 DEMOLITION OF BUILDINGS WITH ASBESTOS / INSULATION MATERIALS
Proper personnel protective equipment and disposal systems must be utilized.
2.2.3 STABILITY DURING DEMOLITION
As work progresses, continuing inspections must be made to detect hazards arising through
weakened or overloaded floors, unsupported walls, or loose material. Immediate steps shall be taken
by bracing or by other means to prevent the premature collapse of the whole or any part of the
structure.
Lateral support should not be removed from more than one story of wall at any time before starting to
demolish it. When a wall from which support has been removed must be left standing at anytime,
including overnight and off-shift work hours, adequate bracing (guying) must be provided to prevent
collapse and to guard against wind pressures.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
2.2.4 WORKING PLACE CLEARANCE
2.2.4.1 ACCESS
A safe means of access to and egress from all working places must be provided. Work places and
the areas around ladders and stairways must be kept clear of material and debris.
2.2.4.2 GLASS REMOVAL
Nails in timber must be removed or bent over, or the timber must be stacked where it will not be a
source of danger. All glass in windows, doors, partitions, etc. should be completely removed prior to
structural demolition.
2.2.5 STRUCTURAL STEEL REMOVAL
All steel construction should be demolished column length by column length and tier by tier. A
structural member being removed must not be under any stress other than its own weight. Members
being cut or dismantled should be chained or lashed in place to prevent uncontrolled swinging or
dropping.
2.2.6 TANKS, VESSELS AND PIPE WORK (EXPLOSION PREVENTION)
2.2.6.1 WELDING AND HOT CUTTING
No tank, vessel, or pipe work which has contained explosive or flammable material shall be subjected
to welding or hot cutting operation until all steps have been taken to remove the substance and any
vapors.
2.2.6.2 COLD CUTTING
The use of cold cutting techniques for the dismantling of tanks, vessels, and pipe work, can
substantially reduce the risk of explosion. Although this is often more costly and laborious, there are
times when it is the only safe method which can be used.
2.2.7 PROTECTIVE CLOTHING AND EQUIPMENT
All demolition workers should be provided with and make use of the following protective
equipment:
1 Safety helmet
2 Goggles
3 Heavy duty gloves
4 Appropriate respiratory equipment (whenever necessary to prevent inhalation of dust
and fumes)
5 Safety boots with steel toe caps and preferably with penetrant resistant soles.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
Safety belts or harnesses (with lifelines where required) shall be used by men working in isolated or
dangerous locations where there is the possibility of them falling and where other preventive
measures are impractical.
2.2.8 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT GUARDS
Mechanical equipment such as cranes and bulldozers should be equipped with wire mesh guards
over windows and with solid protection over the driving position so that there is no danger of the
operator being struck by flying debris.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
2.3 ASBESTOS AND OTHER FIBERS
Asbestos is the generic name given to a number of naturally occurring inorganic fibrous silicate
minerals. Asbestos materials have been widely used in the construction industry and may be present
in a number of manufactured products such as cement sheeting, molded insulation, gaskets, ropes,
blocks, fire resistant boards, etc. For the purpose of these regulations, asbestos is defined as any of
the minerals crocidolite, amosite, chrysotile, fibrous anthophyllite or any mixture containing any of
these minerals. The use of asbestos is restricted.
2.3.1 TYPES OF ASBESTOS
These exist In two main rock-forming mineral groups: 1) Serpentine group, which includes chrysotile
(white asbestos); and, 2) Amphibole group, which includes crocidolite (blue asbestos) and amosite
(brown asbestos). These two main groups were the most widely used asbestos minerals. However,
fibrous anthophyllite has also been used in industry in a few applications. Chrysotile was commonly
used as the reinforcing material in asbestos-cement products. Because crocidolite has high
resistance to acids, it has been extensively used in chemical plants. Due to the superior heat
resistance of amosite it has been used principally for the manufacture of fire-resistant insulation
boards. The majority of asbestos products has been made of white asbestos, but some products
contain blue asbestos (crocidolite). Of the asbestos products manufactured blue asbestos has the
higher health risk. Blue asbestos can usually be recognized by its dark lavender blue color; however,
its presence could be masked by other materials. Since prolonged exposure to heat, as would be the
case with boiler or hotpipe lagging, may change the characteristic blue color of crocidolite to a white
or fawn color.
2.3.2 HEALTH RISKS
Over a period of time, breathing asbestos dust can cause asbestosis (scarring of the lung), which
may go undetected for years after exposure. All forms of asbestos are capable of causing
asbestosis. The most important factors in the development of the disease are the amount of dust to
which the individual is exposed, duration of exposure, and the personal susceptibility of the individual
to the asbestos fiber. In addition, asbestos fibers can penetrate the skin, causing small tumors,
warts, or corns. These asbestos tumors are usually found on the palms or fingers. They may not be
cured unless every minute fiber is removed.
The maximum allowable concentration of airborne asbestos dust shall not exceed 0.2 asbestos
fibers longer than five microns in length per cc of air on a time-weighted average (TWA) exposure for
an eight-hour work day.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
2.3.3 STORAGE AND TRANSPORTATION
All asbestos materials removed from or used on a job shall be stored in an approved container at all
times. For new construction, only that amount of asbestos material that is immediately required for
the operation shall be moved to the work area.
Approved containers shall be used during the transportation of asbestos materials. All such
containers that contain asbestos shall be clearly marked: "Caution: Health Hazard - Contains
Asbestos".
2.3.4 WORK AREA
The work area shall be clearly defined and where feasible roped off and notices displayed warning
persons of the presence of asbestos dust. Signs shall be posted at all approaches to the work area.
These signs shall be posted at readily visible locations near work areas and these notices shall read:
Caution:
ASBESTOS HEALTH HAZARD
Respirator and protective overalls must be worn when entering this area.
Only persons directly concerned with the operation shall be permitted inside the area.
2.3.5 HANDLING AND USE
2.3.5.1 WETTING VENTILATION
The handling, mixing, applying, removing, cutting, and spraying of asbestos materials shall be done in
a wet state so as to prevent the emission of harmful fibers in excess of allowable concentration.
Before removing asbestos cement mortar, coating, grouting, plaster, or similar material containing
asbestos from bags, cartons, or shipping containers, the material shall be wetted or enclosed, or the
operation shall be carried out under total exhaust ventilation.
2.3.5.2 CUTTING
Shearing or punching shall be used in preference to sawing or drilling of asbestos. Where it is

necessary to cut or saw materials containing asbestos using hand or power tools, it shall be done in
a separate cordoned off area with an approved exhaust and dust collection system.
2.3.5.3 PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT
Protective equipment shall be required for all instances where asbestos is used regardless of
ventilation, wetting, etc.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
2.3.6 PROTECTIVE CLOTHING
2.3.6.1 TYPES
Approved disposable overalls shall be provided, head covering, foot protection, and gloves to prevent
any airborne asbestos fibers from coming into contact with the body. A sufficient amount of clothing
will be provided to each employee working with asbestos to ensure that a complete change of clean
protective clothing is available for the start of each shift.
2.3.6.2 CONTAMINATION
At the end of each shift, contaminated personal protective equipment shall be collected and disposed
of. Under no conditions shall contaminated clothing be worn from the work site. Employees shall be
careful to prevent contamination of street clothes from work clothes.
Asbestos-contaminated clothes shall be packed and carried in scaled impermeable bags or

containers and disposed.
2.3.7 RESPIRATORY EQUIPMENT
Where there is an unavoidable emission of asbestos dust, an approved respirator shall be issued for
use to each employee.
2.3.7.1 TYPE
In normal circumstances, an approved filter type dust respirator will be adequate protection; however,
dusty jobs (e.g. stripping, delogging, demolition, etc.) involving asbestos materials require air-
supplied positive pressure respiratory equipment.
2.3.7.2 USE
All employees shall be properly trained in the use of respiratory equipment before being engaged in
any work with asbestos. It is the Supervisor's responsibility to make sure that each worker be
supplied with equipment that provides the level of protection required and of the proper fit.
2.3.7.3 CARE
All respiratory equipment shall be thoroughly checked, cleaned, disinfected and stored at the end of
each work period and before use by other persons.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
2.3.8 WASHING AND CHANGING FACILITIES
Showering/washing facilities shall be provided for all employees engaged in asbestos work.
All employees are to use these facilities before leaving the job site at the end of each shift.
Suitable changing accommodations, disposal facilities for protective clothing worn during asbestos
work and separate accommodations for street clothing not worn during working hours shall be
provided.
2.3.9 DISPOSAL OF WASTE ASBESTOS MATERIALS/CLOTHING
All waste asbestos materials and disposal clothing shall be disposed of in sealed impermeable
bags or containers.
All bags and containers shall be marked "Caution: Health Hazard - Contains Asbestos"
2.3.10 CLEANLINESS OF WORK AREAS AND EQUIPMENT
All machinery, equipment, work areas, and adjacent areas shall be kept free from asbestos dust and
waste.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
2.4 PILING OPERATIONS
Piling operations attract many of the problems associated with other types of construction work:
access, unguarded machinery, housekeeping, etc. Heavy equipment and the stress and vibration
imposed upon that equipment give rise to hazards peculiar to piling operations. The standard of
supervision should be high, as well as the standard and maintenance of equipment. Piling operations
fall into two categories. driving load-bearing piles, which may be driven vertically or raked; and, driving
sheet piles. Piles may be of steel, concrete, timber or any combination of the three. Piling equipment
can vary from a simple air-operated hand-held hammer to a large complex rig.
In order that piling operations may be undertaken with the minimum risk to men and equipment, the
following factors should be considered before work starts.
 The nature and purpose of the operation.

 Soil investigation reports of the area.
 Location and nature of any underground services in the area, which should be then,
precisely located by careful hand digging, under competent supervision.
Where piling operations are within a restricted area, the proper Work Permits should be obtained
before any work is undertaken.
Competent supervision, experienced in piling operations, is essential for piling work.
Equipment of adequate capacity to perform the operation should be assembled. All equipment must
be carefully inspected before being used.
2.4.1.1 CRANES
Cranes used for both lifting and piling operations should be of an adequate size and capacity to
perform the worksafely. Where cranes are to be used for driving raking piles with a drop hammer or
driving piles below the level of the crane using extended leaders, the hammer will be suspended from
the crane at a greater radius than the boom angle indicator will show. In all such cases, the distance
of the hammer from the center point of the crane must be calculated and this distance used to
ascertain the safe working load.
Outriggers, counterbalances, etc., shall be provided to maintain stability of the pile driver rig.
2.4.1.2 PILE GATES
Sufficient timber or steel must be available for the construction of pile gates. Proper ladder access
must be provided to the pile gates, and where they are over 1.8 meters (6 feet) high, handrails or
rigger's belts must be provided.
2.4.1.3 INSPECTION
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
Air compressors or steam boilers must be carefully examined and all hoses and couplings checked
both for leaks and general condition. All steam and air hoses should be fitted with a regulator valve
and a quick acting shut-off valve for emergency.
2.4.1.4 WEDGES
An adequate supply of hardwood wedges should be obtained for adjusting piles while pitching.
Softwood wedges are likely to split and must not be used.
2.4.1.5 TIMBER BLOCK
Stop blocks shall be provided for the leads to prevent the hammer from being raised against the head
block.
Guards shall be provided across the top of the head block to prevent the cable from jumping out of
the sheaves.
Fixed leads shall be provided with ladder and adequate attachment points so that the loft worker may
engage his safety belt lanyard to the leads. If loft platforms are provided, they shall be protected with
standard guardrails.
Steam/air hose leading to the hammer or jet pipe and all hoses shall be securely attached with 1/4"
chain or cable to prevent whip lash.
2.4.1.6 GROUND SUPPORT
The ground upon which the crane or rig will stand should be firm and level. Digger mats or a hard-
core standing should be provided if the ground is likely to subside under the high ground loading
imposed by driving or extracting piles.
2.4.2 DRIVING PILES
2.4.2.1 PITCHING
Piles should only be lifted and positioned in the pile gate or onto the leaders or rig with sound lifting
gear adequate for the purpose. Quick release shackles should be examined before each use. Where
hollow section or concrete piles are lifted with chains or wire slings, timber or burlap packing should
be placed between the lifting gear and the pile. Adequate access, such as a cradle or a properly
secured ladder, must be provided for the topman when pitching sheet piles. The topman must wear
stout gloves when pitching.
2.4.2.2 DRIVING
Workmen should stand clear of the operation while driving is in progress. The emergency shut-off
valve and the crane or winch controls must be operated at all times during driving. The foreman must
be present and so positioned that he can be seen by the crane or winch operator and the man
standing by the valve. When driving raking piles, the pile, leaders, and machine must all be in the
same line. Under no circumstances should any man touch the hammer until all valves are closed. A
system of signals must be arranged between the foreman, the winch or crane operator, and the valve
operator, so that the emergency shutdown does not depend on verbal communication. Where the
head of a pile becomes distorted through driving, no attempt should be made to clear it from the
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
leaders by lifting or booming up. The pile head should be cut off and the debris cleared from the
leaders.
2.4.3 PILE EXTRACTION
No attempt should be made to extract piles which have been hammer-driven by lifting or booming up
with a crane. A steam, air, or electric operated extractor should be used. Particular attention should
be paid to the extractor wedges and the condition of the gripping faces, which should not be smooth.
Workmen must not walk under piles that are suspended from extractors.
2.4.4 GENERAL PRECAUTIONS
Men handling piles or working on piling operations should always wear safety helmets, safety shoes,
safety glasses, stout gloves, and be equipped with ear protection, preferably of the muff type.
At the start of each shift, hammers and extractors should be carefully checked for loose bolts, etc.
All other equipment should be inspected daily for defects.
Piling operations should never be undertaken except under competent supervision and with a crew
experienced in this class of work. Crane operators shall have a valid heavy equipment license.
Piling operations are a construction process with special hazards. In addition to these special
hazards, men are exposed to the hazards commonly associated with all types of construction work,
and precautions against these general hazards must not be neglected.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
2.5 ROADWORKS
When Bonatti is engaged in roadwork it is not only responsible for the safety of its own men, it also
has an obligation to protect the public from potential construction hazards, during the day, at night
and in all weather conditions. Consequently, the marking of construction sites and the safe and
efficient diversion and control of traffic must be properly planned and executed
2.5.1 GENERAL
Barriers, lights, etc-shall be provided.
To avoid creating a traffic hazard, warning devices must not be put in place until they are needed.
They must be promptly removed when work is complete.
Activities which produce dust shall be kept to a minimum.
Permanent road signs and striping shall be restored before the roadway is returned to service-
The surface of any highway, street, or sidewalk shall be level and in good condition before any
barriers and markers are removed.
A flagman, equipped with a safety vest and a red flag, shall be posted at least 50 meters (165 feet)
from the work site at the entrance barricade and another flagman at the exit barricade. It shall be the
duty of the flagmen to control the flow of traffic in a safe manner. Both flagmen shall be in sight of
each other. If conditions do not permit this, then a third man shall be positioned where he can see
and be seen by the other two men in order to signal them to start or stop traffic. At night, flagmen
shall wear light-reflecting vests and gloves, and use reflective signs or flags. Flagmen shall be
stationed in an illuminated area.
During darkness, the work area will be marked by lights spaced 10 meters (30 feet) apart. Warning
lights used in oil operations, industrial, or company housing areas shall be weather proof and
positioned 0.6 meter (2 feet) and 0.9 meter (3 feet) above grade.
In addition to the foregoing, excavation work in residential areas shall be entirely enclosed, covered
over, or roped-off.
Excavations in sidewalks or areas of expected pedestrian traffic shall be provided with close-planked
walkways or bridges 0.9 meters (3 feet) wide and equipped with standard guardrails.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
2.6 WORKING PLACES, LADDERS, AND SCAFFOLDING
Every employer of workmen has a legal and contractual responsibility to ensure that each place at
which his men work is safe and that it remains safe so long as men work there. Similarly, each
supervisor is responsible for ensuring that every man working under his direction or control has a
safe working place and a safe means of getting to and from every working place.
Where work cannot safely be done on the ground or from part of a building or permanent structure,
scaffolds, ladders, or other means of support shall be provided and properly maintained.
2.6.1 WORKING PLACES, GENERAL
2.6.1.1 FALLS
Every working place shall be safe and of adequate dimensions. Where men, tools, or materials could
fall 1.8 meters (6 feet) or more, a guardrail system (consisting of toprails and midrails) and toeboards
shall be provided. Should the provision of these safeguards be impracticable, other means of
preventing falls, such as safety belts, etc. shall be used.
2.6.1.2 ACCESS AND EGRESS
A safe means of getting to and from a working place shall be provided and used.
2.6.1.3 LIGHTING
Every working place and every means of getting to and from a working place shall be provided with
adequate lighting which shall be properly maintained.
2.6.1.4 PREVENTION OF FALLS
Permanent decking, parts of a structure, walkways, footbridges, etc., which men use in the course of
their work or for a permanent or temporary access, shall be provided with a guardrail system and
toeboards (permanent or temporary) at all edges from which men, tools, or materials could fall 1.8
meters (6 feet) or more. Holes and gaps shall be guarded or securely covered. Stairs (permanent or
temporary) shall have all treads properly secured and shall be fitted with handrails throughout their
length.
2.6.1.5 RAMPS
Where the slope of a ramp exceeds 1 vertical to 4 horizontal, the ramp shall be fitted with stepping
cleats at 0.3 meter (1 foot) intervals. When a ramp is to be used by the general public, its slope shall
not exceed 1 vertical to 4 horizontal. Handrails shall be provided.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
2.6.1.6 FALLING MATERIAL
Where there is danger of men being struck by falling material, protective coverings shall be erected
or No. 18 gauge wire, 1/2 inch mesh or equivalent, shall be securely fixed between the toeboard and
midrail to prevent falling objects.
2.6.1.7 HOT SURFACES
Suitable precautions shall be taken to prevent men coming into contact with any hot surface.
2.6.1.8 SLIPPING AND TRIPPING
Supervisors are responsible for maintaining good housekeeping to prevent slipping, tripping, and
falling. Oil spills, mud, scrap, and other debris must be cleared up immediately. Men shall not be
permitted to walk or work on steel work or other surfaces on which paint or cement wash is still wet.
2.6.1.9 ROOF WORK
Where work is done on or from the roof of a building or structure, or where men have to , work on, or
work from fragile roofs or surfaces, adequate protection in the form of crawling boards, roof ladders,
or other suitable covering must be provided to prevent men and materials falling from or through the
roof Temporary guardrails shall be placed to prevent workers from falling. If roof work is
accomplished on pitched roofs with a slope greater than 1:4, workers shall be equipped with safety
belts that are securely anchored to the structure. During storms or high winds, workers shall not be
working on a roof or scaffold that is exposed to the weather.
2.6.1.10 INSECURE STRUCTURES
Unstable or weak structures shall be supported by guys, stays, supports, or other fixings where
necessary. If work being done is likely to reduce the stability of an
existing structure or building, bracing or other means of support shall be used.
Unstable structures shall not be left unsupported over night
No wall sector which is more than one story in height, shall be permitted to stand alone without lateral
bracing, unless such wall was originally designed to do so and is in a safe condition to be self-
supporting. All walls shall be left in a stable condition at the end of each shift by bracing support jacks,
timbers and/or guy-wired, taking wind force and storm conditions into consideration.
2.6.1.11 WORK OVER WATER
Where men work on, over or near water, a guardrail system and toeboards, fencing or other suitable
barriers shall be provided for the protection of the worker.
Wherever the provision of a guardrail system and toeboards, fencing or other suitable barriers is
impracticable, or if for any reason men are outside the protection of these safeguards, suitable life
vests shall be worn and a safety belt or harness securely fixed to a dropline.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
Approved rescue equipment in the form of life rings with life lines, etc.; where necessary, a suitably
equipped rescue boat shall be readily available, and properly maintained. Men shall be thoroughly
trained in the use of all protective and rescue equipment, first aid and cardiopulmonary resuscitation
(CPR).
2.6.2 LADDERS AND STEPLADDERS
The safety of a ladder depends on four important factors: selection, condition, position and use.
Ladders shall comply with the referenced European or equivalent codes.
2.6.2.1 SELECTION
A ladder must be of the proper length for the job to be done. If it is to be used for access or as a
working place, it shall rise to a height of 36 inches to 42 inches above the landing place or above the
highest rung to be reached by the feet of the man using the ladder.
Metal ladders, ladders with metal reinforced side rails, and ladders which are wet shall not be used
near electrical equipment with exposed live conductors. Such ladders shall have a warning notice
attached to guard against use near electrical equipment.
Aluminum ladders shall not be used where there is a likelihood of contact with materials harmful to
aluminum, such as caustic liquids, damp lime, wet cement, etc.
2.6.2.2 CONDITION
Each ladder shall be examined before use. Those with split or broken side rails, missing, broken,
loose, decayed or damaged rungs or cleats, or with other faulty equipment shall be tagged and
removed from service.
Rungs shall be properly mortised into side rails. Cleats shall be inset by 2.25 centimeters (7/8 inch),
or filler blocks used on the side rails between the cleats. Cleats shall be uniformly spaced 30.5
centimeters (1 foot) between centers.
2.6.2.3 POSITION
The side rails of a ladder shall be equally supported on a firm level surface. Boxes, blocks, barrels,
etc. shall not be used as a means of support. The area at the base of a ladder must be kept clear.
Ladders shall not be used in a horizontal position as platforms, runways or scaffolds.
Ladders shall not be supported on their rungs or cleats. Rungs or cleats shall not be used to support
planks.
Whenever possible, ladders shall be set at an angle of 75° to horizontal ground (i.e., one meter out to
four meters up).
Metal reinforcing shall be on the underside of the rungs and where reinforcing is on only one side of
the side rails, that too shall be on the underside.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
Both side rails of a ladder shall be evenly supported at the upper resting place. Side rails must be
securely tied off to prevent movement. Where secure fixing is impracticable, the measures must be
taken to prevent movement by securing at the base, using side guys, or stationing a man at the base.
It must be understood, however, that a man stationed at the base will be unable to control a ladder
more than 6 meters (20 feet) in length.
Where there is a possibility of a ladder being struck by moving vehicles or equipment, a man should
be placed on guard or a space at the base should be securely fenced off. If a ladder is erected close
to a doorway, the door should either be locked, shut, or be secured in the open position with a man
on guard or properly barricaded.
Ladder landing places shall be provided at least every 9 meters (30 feet) of height and shall be fitted
with a guardrail system and toeboards. Holes in decking through which ladders pass shall only be
enough to permit passage of the man using the ladder.
A ladder should always be placed so that there is space behind each rung or cleat for a proper
foothold. There should be no obstruction in the way of a man's foot, particularly at the landing
platform. Here the rung or cleat should be level with the platform,
Where ladders have to be suspended, both side rails shall be lashed top and bottom so as to provide
equal support. Where long ladders are used, they shall also be lashed at the center to prevent lateral
movement.
2.6.2.4 USE
Where an extension ladder is used fully extended, the minimum overlap depends on the extension
ladder length, and overlap should be as follows (examples):
9.75 to 10.97 meters (32 to 36 feet) = 1.22 meters (4 feet) overlap

10.97 to 14.63 meters (36 to 48 feet) = 1.52 meters (5 feet) overlap
Splicing or lashing ladders together shall not be permitted.
Before mounting a ladder, personnel shall check their shoes for freedom from grease, oil or mud.
They shall always step through, not around, the rail extensions at the top of the ladder.
Single rung and single cleat ladder should be used by only one man at a time. When ascending or
descending personnel shall face the ladder and keep both hands on the ladder. Personnel shall not
run up or down or slide down a ladder at any time. The width of single cleat ladders shall be at least
3
8. 1 centimeters ( 15 inches) but not more than 50.8 centimeters (20 inches) between rails at the top.
Men ascending or descending ladders shall not carry tools and materials in their hands. Tools may
be carried in pockets or on special belts provided there is no risk of injury and movement is not
impaired, Materials shall be raised or lowered using a handline after being securely tied or placed in a
basket.
A man working on or from a ladder must always have a secured handhold and both feet on the same
rung or cleat. If the work to be done requires the use of both hands, a safety belt is required, securely
fixed to a dropline (life line). Only one person shall be on a ladder at a time.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
Job-made ladders shall be constructed for intended use. If a ladder is to provide the only means of
access or exit from a working area for 25 or more employees, or if simultaneous two-way traffic is
expected, a double cleat ladder shall be installed.
Double cleat ladders on shall not exceed 4.5 meters (15 feet) in length.
Single cleat ladders shall not exceed 4.5 meters (15 feet) in length between supports (base and top
landing). If ladders are to connect different landings, or if the length required exceeds this maximum
length, two or more separate ladders shall be used, offset with a platform between each ladder.
A guardrail system and toeboards shall be erected on the exposed sides of the platforms.
5.08 by 10. 16 centimeters (2 by 4 inches) lumber shall be used for side rails of single cleat ladders
up to 4.5 meters (15 feet) long.
5.08 by 10. 16 centimeters (2 by 4 inches) lumber snail be used tor side and middle rails of double
cleat ladders up to 3.6 meters (12 feet) in length; 5.08 by 15.24 centimeters (2 by 6 inches) lumber
for double cleat ladders from 3.6 by 4.5 meters (12 to 15 feet) in length.
Wood cleats shall have the following minimum dimensions when made of woods that meet
European (CE) or equivalent requirements for ladders:
LENGTH OF CLEAT THICKNESS WIDTH
Up to and including 50.8 cm (20 1.9 cm (.75 in) 7.62 cm (3 in)

inches
Over 50.8 cm (20 in.) and up to 1.9 cm (.75 in) 9.52 cm (3.75 in.)
and including 76.20 cm
(30 in.)
Cleats may be made of species of any other group of wood provided equal or greater strength is
maintained.
Cleats shall be inset into the edges of the side rails one-half inch, or filler blocks shall be used on the
rails between the cleats. The cleats shall be secured to each rail with three 10 cm common wire
nails or other fasteners of equivalent strength. Cleats shall be uniformly spaced, 30.48 centimeters
(12 inches) between centers.
Metal ladders shall not be used for work on electrical systems unless the ladders are specifically
designed for that application.
2.6.2.5 STEPLADDERS
Generally, the foregoing remarks on selection, condition and use of ladders apply equally to
stepladders. The following requirements also apply:
To ensure stability, stepladders shall be spread to their fullest extent limited by manufacturer's
braces when in use. Whenever possible, they should be placed at right angles to the work with either
the front or back facing the work.
Do not stand, climb or sit on the stepladder top, pail shelf, braces or back section.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
2.6.2.6 GENERAL
Ladders and stepladders shall be maintained in good condition at all times. Joints shall be tight, all
hardware and fittings shall be securely attached, and movable parts shall operate freely without
binding or undue play.
Ladders and stepladders must not be painted.
Where a ladder is carried by one man, the front end should be kept high enough to clear men's
heads and special care shall be taken at corners and blind spots.
2.6.3 SCAFFOLDING COMPONENTS
All scaffold structures shall be erected with metal components. Scaffolds shall be stored to prevent
damage and to permit easy access for use.
2.6.3.1 TUBING
Ordinary scaffold tubing is 4.8 centimeters (1-29/32 inches) in diameter and nominal wall thickness
0.4 centimeter (5/32 inch) and is referred to as one-inch and half nominal diameter tubing. It is mild
steel and normally supplied in lengths of 6.4 meters (21 feet). Tubes must meet ANSI or equivalent
requirements and must be free from cracks and surface flaws, laminations, excessive rust and other
defects. The ends shall be cut square and cleanly. A tube shall not deviate from a straight line by
more than 1/600 of its length measured at the center of the tube length.
2.6.3.2 ALUMINUM TUBING
Although the aluminum tubing is dimensionally interchangeable with steel tubing, it must not be used
in the same structure; the difference in the elastic modulus of the two materials results in greater
deflection in aluminum tubing for the same loading conditions.
Aluminum tubing shall not be used where there is likelihood of contact with materials harmful to
aluminum such as caustic liquids, damp lime, wet cement and sea water.
2.6.3.3 FITTINGS
All fittings (couplers, clamps, etc.) shall be of a metal type. They shall be examined regularly and care
must be taken to ensure that moving parts are sound and well lubricated and that threads are not
stripped.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
2.6.3.4 TYPICAL SCAFFOLD FITTINGS
Base Plate: A 15 centimeter (6 inch) by 15 centimeter (6 inch) steel plate greater than
0.64 centimeters (l/4 inch) thick providing a flat bearing surface for load
distribution from posts. It has an integral spigot and fixing holes for use with
sills.
Screwjacks: Used for compensating variations in ground levels.
Standard Coupler: Also known as a Right Angle or 90° Coupler. A load bearing coupler used for
connecting two tubes together at right angles.
Adjustable Coupler: Used for connecting two tubes together at any angle through 360°. Not to be
used where a load bearing standard coupler is required.
End-to-End Coupler: Also known as a Sleeve Coupler. Used for connecting two tubes end-to-end.
Reveal Pin: Inserted into the end of a tube and adjusted to form a rigid horizontal or
vertical member between two opposing surfaces. It forms a solid anchorage
to which a scaffold can be tied.
2.6.3.5 PLANKS
Planks shall be of rough timber and graded as scaffold planks without defects (2" x 9"), 5 centimeters
(2 inches) thick by 23 centimeters (9 inches) wide, and shall conform to the following specifications:
1 All planking shall be Scaffold Grade to ANSI requirements.

2 On the face of the plank, the ends shall not be split up more than 30.5 centimeters (1
foot), without fixed banding or the end bolted through.
3 On the face of the plank, not more than one third the width in any one place shall be
knot wood.
4 On the edge of the plank, not more than half the depth shall be knot wood.
5 On the edge of the plank, the grain shall not cross from face-to-face within a distance
of less than 30.5 centimeters (1 foot).
6 From end-to-end, the plank must not be twisted by more than 1.3 centimeters (l/2
inch).
7 Scaffold planks shall meet the loading requirements of Table II.2.
Planks shall not be painted or treated in any way that would conceal defects.
Planks which are split, decayed or warped shall not be used, but the parts affected may be cut offto
produce shorter planks with the ends banded or bolted through.
Planks should be stacked on a suitable foundation. Where the height of a stack exceeds 20 planks,
measures should be taken to tie or bond succeeding layers.
Planks should not be stood on end unattended.
Scaffold planks shall not be used for shuttering for concrete, shoring for trenches, or as sills for
scaffolding. Planks shall be inspected for defects, including decay, prior to each use. 1
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
The design working load of each platform unit (i.e., plank) shall be capable of supporting without
failure one or more 91 kg (200 lb) person with 22.7 kg (50 lb.) of equipment.
Platform units rated for one person capacity shall be designed and constructed to carry 113.6 kg
(250 lb.) at the center of the span.
Platform units rated for two persons shall be designed and constructed to carry a working load of 227
kg (500 lb.) : 113.6 kg (250 lb.) placed at 0.46 meters (18 inches) to the left and right of the center of
the span.
Platform units rated for three persons shall designed and constructed to carry a working load of 341
kg (750 lb.) : 113.6 kg (250 lb.) placed at 0.46 meters (18 inches) to the left and right of the center of
the span, and at the center of the span.
The design loads shown are not to be added to uniformly distributed loads for light, medium and
heavy duty scaffold (i.e., 25, 50 and 75 lb./ft2 respectively), but are shown as alternates.
Each platform, where applicable, shall be designed and constructed to carry a uniformly distributed
load as an alternate to the person loading before shown. Uniformly distributed loads and person
loading are not cumulative and the most restrictive loading shall be used for platform design.
Light, medium and heavy duty uniformly distributed load requirements shall be 25, 50 and 75 pounds
per square foot respectively. Greater uniformly distributed loads shall be specially designed.
WOOD SCAFFOLD PLANK LOADING CHART Table II.2

Permissible Span (ft)
Douglas Fir or Southern Pine Spruce Rough Sawn

2 in x 10 in 1-7/8 in x 9-7/8 in
Nominal or or
Loading Condition 1/2 in x 9-1/4 in Actual 2 in x 9 in
One worker or medium-duty 10 ft 8 ft
Two workers or heavy-duty 8 ft 7 ft
Three workers 5 ft 5 ft
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
2.6.4 REQUIREMENTS COMMON TO ALL SCAFFOLDING
2.6.4.1 FOUNDATIONS
A sound base is essential; therefore, the ground or floor on which a scaffold is going to stand must
be carefully examined. Sand or madeup ground may need compacting to ensure there are no
cavities. Such bases as floors, roofs, etc. may need shoring from underneath.
Scaffolds, including components, shall be capable of supporting without failure at least 4 times the
maximum intended load.
Timber sills at least 23 centimeters (9 inches) wide by 3.8 centimeters (1-1/2 inches) thick (not
scaffold planks) will be required to spread the load on sand, made up ground, asphalt pavement,
wooden floors, and slippery surfaces. A sill shall extend under at least two posts.
Where scaffolding is erected on a solid bearing such as rock or concrete, small timber pads may be
used in place of sills and nailed to prevent the base plates sliding off.
Concrete blocks, barrels, and other loose or unsuitable material shall not be used for the construction
or support of scaffolding.
If used to compensate for variations in ground level, the screwJack shall not be adjusted to more than
two-thirds of the total length of the thread. The base plate shall be of a type approved for supporting
scaffolding posts. (See manufacturer's specifications.)
2.6.4.2 POSTS
Posts shall be pitched on 15 centimeters (6 inches) by 15 centimeters (6 inch) steel base plates and
at least 0.64 centimeter (l/4 inch) thick. Joints in posts should be staggered, i.e., joints in adjacent
posts should not occur in the same lift. All posts shall be vertical,
The inner row of posts shall be placed as close as possible to the face of the building or structure. To
avoid projections, the posts may be up to 41 centimeters (16 inches) away from the wall or structure
as necessary, provided that, where there is room to do so, the gap between the wall or structure and
the inner posts shall be closed with planks on extended board bearers. The outer row of posts shall
be positioned from the inner row of posts depending on the load requirements of the scaffold, and the
working platform shall be fully decked out.
2.6.4.3RUNNERS
Runners shall be securely fixed to posts with standard couplers and shall be horizontal. Joints in
runners should be staggered, i.e., joints in adjacent runners should not occur in the same bay.
Runners should be secured end-to-end by sleeve couplers, not by joint pins.
Runners shall be vertically spaced no more than 2.0 meters (6 feet, 6 inches) to give adequate
headroom along the platforms.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
2.6.4.4 BEARERS
Bearers should be installed between posts and securely fixed to the posts bearing on the runner
coupler and secured with standard couplers. When coupled directly to the runners, the coupler must
be kept as close to the posts as possible. These bearers must remain in position as they are a
structural part of the scaffold.
2.6.4.5 BOARD BEARERS
Board bearers shall be installed between bearers to accommodate differences in plank lengths.
Board bearers shall be secured to the runners between bearers where necessary to support platform
units (planks). These may be removed when no longer required to support platform units.
2.6.4.6 BRACING
Cross bracing shall be installed across the width of the scaffold at least every third set of posts
horizontally and every fourth runner vertically. Such bracing shall extend diagonally from the inner and
outer runners upward to the next outer and inner runners. These braces should be fixed to the
runners with standard couplers as close to the posts as possible. Where such a fixing is
impracticable, adjustable couplers may be used to fix the braces to the posts.
Longitudinal diagonal bracing shall be installed at approximately 45degree angle from near the base
of the first outer post upward to the extreme top of the scaffold. Where possible, such bracing shall
be duplicated at every fifth post. On short but high runs, diagonal bracing shall be installed at an angle
of 45 degrees from the base of the first outer post to the last outer post and shall alternate directions
to the top of the scaffold. When bracing cannot be attached to the posts, this bracing may be
attached to the runners, as close as possible to the posts. Only standard couplers or adjustable
couplers may be used. Joints in braces shall be made with end-to-end or parallel couplers.
Temporary rakers (inclined load-bearing tube supports) bra scaffold against the ground when setting
out. These rakers replaced by permanent braces, when the scaffold has been plumbed, leveled and
tied. Rakers must be secured with proper couplers scaffold and coupled to a ground stake.
2.6.4.7 TIES
It is essential that all scaffolds, with the exception of certain tower and mobile scaffolds (See 2.8.7
and 2.8.8), be securely tied to the building or structure throughout their length and height to prevent
movement of the scaffold either towards or away from the building or structure. This should be done
by connecting a tie tube to both runners or posts and coupling this to a two-way tie or column box tie
assembly.
Where the foregoing is impracticable, tubes may be securely wedged between opposing surfaces on
the building or structure by the use of reveal pins and coupled to the tie tubes. Where reveal ties are
used, they shall not exceed 50% of the total number of ties. Two-way ties or column box ties shall be
evenly distributed over the scaffold area. To ensure the security of reveal ties, it is necessary to
check frequently for tightness.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
Ties shall occur at the top of the scaffold and at least every 7.9 meters (26 feet) vertically and 9.1
meters (30 feet) horizontally and at each end of the scaffold. All tie assembly connections shall be
made with standard couplers.
2.6.4.8 PLATFORM UNITS
All platform units (i.e., planks, fabricated decks, etc.) shall be closed planked with, whenever
practicable, each plank resting on at least three supports. Planks shall extend over their end supports
by not less than 15 centimeters (6 inches) and not more than 30.5 centimeters (12 inches).
Supports for scaffold planks shall be spaced with due regard to the nature of the platform and the
load it will bear.
Except on platform units adjacent to the surface of a cylindrical or spherical structure, planks shall be
laid flush.
Planks shall be secured in position to prevent displacement by high winds.
Adequate space for men to pass in safety shall be provided and maintained wherever materials are
placed on platform units or if any higher platform is erected thereon.
Platform units shall be kept free of unnecessary obstructions, materials, and projecting nails.
Platform units which have become slippery with oil or any other substance shall be cleaned, or
otherwise removed and replaced.
Slopes in platform units shall not exceed 1 vertical to 4 horizontal and stepping cleats at 0.3 meter (1
foot) intervals shall be provided.
All platform units shall be closed planked for the full width of the scaffold structure.
2.6.4.9 GUARDRAIL SYSTEMS AND TOEBOARDS
Guardrail systems (consisting of toprails and midrails) and toeboards shall be installed at all open
sides and ends of all scaffolds and supports on no more than 3-meter (10-foot) centers from which
men or materials could fall a distance of more than 1.8 meters (6 feet). Toprails shall be no less than
0.91 meter (36 inches) and no more than 1. 14 meters (45 inches) above the working surface;
midrails shall be installed equidistant between the working surface and the toprail. Toeboards shall
not be less than 10 centimeters (4 inches) in height by 2.5 centimeters (1 inch) thick. Guardrail
systems and toeboards shall be securely fixed to the inside of posts to withstand a lateral thrust of
200 pounds.
Landings: Safe landings shall be provided at the top of all ladders. Rings shall be eliminated above
the landing level, and side rails shall extend 36 to 42 inches above the landing for mounting and
dismounting. Where multiple ladders are required, solidly decked platforms shall be provided.
Guardrails, intermediate rails and toeboards shall be erected on the outside edges and exposed
sides of the platform.
2.6.4.10 ACCESS
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
Access to a working platform is best achieved by providing a separate ladder tower or a cantilevered
access platform so as not to obstruct the working platform and to minimize the risk of persons failing
through gaps in the guardrail system or platform units. Access must be provided to working
platforms.
2.6.4.11 SCAFFOLD LADDERS
Scaffold ladders provide the means of access and egress for scaffolds. They can generally be
classified as follows:
Portable Straight and Extension Ladders
A straight ladder is a portable ladder that only consists of one section which determines its overall
length. It cannot support itself or be adjusted in length.
An extension ladder is a portable ladder that cannot support itself but can be adjusted in length. It
consists of two or more sections which are arranged to permit length adjustment. Its overall length is
the sum of the length of all its sections measured along the side rails.
Portable straight and extension ladders shall have a firm base and be positioned with a slope of with
a slope of 75° degrees to horizontal ground.
Vertical Ladder
A vertical ladder is a type of fixed ladder which is permanently attached to the horizontal or vertical
components of a scaffolding.
The main criteria to consider in the use of a vertical ladder is clearance. The following clearance
guidelines shall be used.
 General: Safe clearances shall be maintained to prevent workers from bumping

into, or nagging onto, projecting objects while ascending or descending the
ladder
 Climbing Side: Ladders shall have a minimum clear perpendicular distance of 30 inches
from the rungs to the nearest projecting object on the climbing side. When
unavoidable obstructions are encountered, the minimum clearance
distance may be reduced to 24 inches if deflector plates are provided,
 Back Side Of Ladder: The perpendicular distance from the face of the rung on the climbing side to
the nearest fixed object on the back side of the ladder shall not be less
than 10 inches. When unavoidable, horizontal obstructions (e.g. beams,
pipes, etc.) are encountered, the vertical toe clearances specified in the
following sections, shall apply.
 Side Clearance: The minimum clear distance to the nearest fixed object shall be 15 inches on
each side of the centerline of single rung ladders.
 Vertical Clearance: The minimum vertical toe clearance from horizontal obstructions shall be 1 1/2
inches below and 4 1/2 inches above the top edge of the rung.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
 Multiple Ladders: When two or more separate ladders are used with a landing platform, the side-
step distance shall be a minimum of 15 inches from the centerline of the
upper ladder to the near side of the lower ladder-
2.6.4.12 WORKMANSHIP
Scaffolding shall be erected, altered, and dismantled by experienced men working under the direction
of a competent supervisor.
Posts shall be set accurately in place and checked vertically by using a spirit level or by using vertical
lines on the building or structure.
Scaffolding couplers should be tightened with proper scaffolding spanners. The use of an ordinary
spanner or tool giving greater leverage could damage the screw threads and render the coupler
unserviceable.
Scaffolding materials shall not be thrown or dropped from heights.
2.6.4.13 INSPECTIONS
All scaffolds shall be inspected regularly by a competent Supervisor and after adjustments,
modifications, adverse weather conditions, etc. Erected scaffolds and platforms should also be
inspected continuously, by those using the scaffold, to insure that the scaffold has not been altered
and is in a safe working condition.
2.6.5 FABRICATED TUBULAR FRAME AND SYSTEM SCAFFOLDING
Fabricated tubular frame and system scaffolding are composed wholly or partly of prefabricated
sections. There are many types of fabricated tubular frame and system scaffolding available which
vary in design and methods of erection; however, the same basic principles set out in 2.6.10 and the
following matters warrant particular attention. All scaffolds must be erected as per manufacturer's
direction and limitations
To be erected, altered and dismantled by experienced men, under the direction of a competent
Supervisor.
Periodic inspections shall be made of all parts and accessories. Broken, bent, altered, excessively
rusted or otherwise structurally damaged frames or accessories shall not be used.
All fabricated tubular frame and system scaffolding shall be constructed and erected to support four
times the maximum intended loads
Scaffold posts shall be pitched on steel base plates and on timber sills or pads as necessary.
ScrewJacks shall be used to compensate for variations in ground level.
Scaffolds shall be properly braced by cross braces and longitudinal diagonal braces for securing
vertical members together. The cross braces shall be of such length as will automatically square and
align vertical members so that the erected scaffold is always plumb, square, and rigid. All brace
connections shall be made secure.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
The frames or posts shall be placed one on top of the other with coupling or stacking pins to ensure
proper vertical alignment of the legs.
The frames and posts shall be locked together vertically by pins or other equivalent suitable means.
Fabricated tubular ftame and system scaffolding over 38 meters (125 feet) in height shall be specially
designed by a Professional Engineer.
2.6.6 TUBE AND COUPLER SCAFFOLDS
2.6.6.1 INDEPENDENT TIED SCAFFOLD
An independent tied scaffold (also commonly known as a double pole scaffold) consists of a double
row of posts connected together longitudinally with runners and with bearers at right angles to the
runners. Braces and ties are essential for stability. Independent tied scaffold is the most common
form of tube and coupler scaffolding and is divided into three groups.
1 Light Duty: for painting, cleaning, etc.

2 Medium Duty: when materials are deposited on the platforms,
3 Heavy Duty.- where the deposited material is of a more substantial nature.
2.6.6.2 LIGHT DUTY TUBE AND COUPLER SCAFFOLDS
Design, Loading and Dimensions
A light duty tube and coupler scaffold can have up to three working platforms in use at any one time,
and the maximum distributed load on the platform shall be 1.2 kPa (25 lb./sq. ft) with posts 3.05
meters (10 feet) apart longitudinally and 1.83 meters (6 feet) transversely.
TUBE AND COUPLER SCAFFOLDS LIGHT DUTY
Uniformly distributed load Not to exceed 25 p. s.f

Post Spacing (longitudinal) 10 ft. 0 in.
Post Spacing (transverse) 6 ft. 0 in.
Working Levels Additional Planked Levels Maximum Height

1 8 125 ft
2 4 125 ft
3 0 91 ft 0 in.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
Platform
The platform between posts should be decked out with 23 centimeters (9 inches) wide by 5.1
centimeters (2 inches) thick planks. Bearers may be cantilevered for use as brackets to carry not
more than two planks between the building and inner post.
Limitations
Light duty tube and coupler scaffolds erected in accordance with these directions may be used up to
a maximum height of 38.1 meters (125 feet) and limited to a uniformly distributed load of 25 lb./ft2.
Light duty tube and coupler scaffolds departing from these directions shall be specially designed or
designed to a higher rating such as medium or heavy duty.
2.6.6.3 MEDIUM DUTY TUBE AND COUPLER SCAFFOLD
Design, Loading, and Dimensions
A medium duty tube and coupler scaffold may have up to two working platforms in use at any one
time. The maximum distributed load on each platform shall not exceed 2.39 kPa (50 lb./sq. ft) with
posts not more than 2.4 meters (8 feet) apart longitudinally and 1.83 meters (6 feet) transversely.
TUBE AND COUPLER SCAFFOLDS---MEDIUM DUTY
Uniformly _distributed load Not to exceed 50 p.s.f.

Post Spacing (transverse) 6 ft. _0 in.

1 6 125 ft
2 0 78 ft 0 in.
Platform
The platform between posts should be decked out with 23 centimeters (9 inches) wide by 5.1
centimeters (2 inches) thick planks. Bearers may be cantilevered for use as brackets to carry not
more than two planks between the building and inner post.
Limitations
Medium duty tube and coupler scaffolds erected in accordance with these directions may be used up
to a maximum height of 38.1 meters (125 feet) and limited to a uniformly distributed load of 50 lb./ft2.
Medium duty tube and coupler scaffolds departing from these directions shall be specially designed
or designed to a higher rating such as heavy duty.
Bearers
Bearers on medium duty tube and coupler scaffolds shall be 6.35 centimeters (2.5 inches) outside
diameter steel tube and of nominal wall thickness of 0.4 centimeter (5/32 inch).
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
2.6.6.4 HEAVY DUTY TUBE AND COUPLER SCAFFOLDS
Design, Loading and Dimensions
A heavy duty tube and coupler scaffold has one working platform with a maximum distributed load of
3.6 kPa (75 lb./sq ft) on the platform. The posts shall be no more than 2.0 meters (6 feet, 6 inches)
apart longitudinally and 1.8 meters (6 feet transversely).
TUBE AND COUPLER SCAFFOLDS-HEAVY DUTY
Uniformly distributed load Not to exceed 7 5 p. s. f

Post Spacing (transverse) 6 ft. 0 in.

1 6 125 ft
Platform
The platform between the posts shall be decked out with 23 centimeters (9 inches) wide by 5.1
centimeters (2 inches) thick planks.
Limitations
Heavy duty tube and coupler scaffolds erected in accordance with these directions may be used up
to a maximum height of 38.1 meters (125 feet).
Heavy duty tube and coupler scaffolds departing from these directions shall be specially designed.
Bearers
Bearers on heavy duty tube and coupler scaffolds shall be 6.35 centimeters (2.5 inches) outside
diameter steel tube and be of nominal wall thickness 0.4 centimeter (5/32 inch).
2.6.7 FREE-STANDING TOWER SCAFFOLDS
A free-standing tower scaffold consists of four or more posts connected together longitudinally with
runners and bearers at right angles to the runners, forming a square or rectangular tower.
Alternatively, a free-standing tower scaffold may be constructed of a fabricated tubular frame or
system scaffolding (see 2.6.5). A free-standing tower scaffold has a single working platform and is a
common form of access scaffolding for painters and others who do work of a light nature and of
short duration.
2.6.7.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
For general requirements, see 2.6.4 and where a fabricated tubular frame or system scaffolding is to
be used, see 2.6.5.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
2.6.7.2 DESIGN, LOADING AND DIMENSIONS
A free-standing tower scaffold shall have only one working platform and the maximum distributed
load shall not exceed the load rating which is determined by the platform unit type and the scaffold
duty.
The height from the base to working platform of a free-standing tower scaffold shall not exceed four
times the minimum base dimension. In no case shall the minimum base dimension be less than 1.2
meters (4 feet)
2.6.7.3 RUNNERS AND BEARERS
The vertical spacing of runners and bearers shall be 2.0 meters (6 feet, 6 inches). The lowest
runners and bearers shall be as near to the base as possible. Runners and bearers shall be secured
to the posts with standard couplers.
2.6.7.4 BRACING
Sway bracing is necessary on all four elevations to the full height of the scaffold. Plan bracing is also
required at the base, at the top, and at every third lift to prevent racking.
2.6.7.5 TIES
Free-standing tower scaffolds more than 9.8 meters (32 feet) in height shall be adequately tied to a
building or structure. Where tying to a building or structure is impracticable, one of the following
methods of ensuring stability shall be used
 Guy wires at a slope of approximately 45° connected to the working platform level of the tower.
 Bottom corners of the tower securely anchored.
 Outriggers extending to the ground.
The strength of the guy wires or of the anchorage used shall be calculated, having due regard to the
horizontal wind forces and other known forces which may be applied to the tower. These calculations
shall be reviewed by Loss Prevention Department.
2.6.7.6 PLATFORM
The single working platform of a free-standing tower scaffold shall not project beyond the base area
and the platform unit(s) shall be securely fixed in position.
2.6.7.7 ACCESS
Where the means of access to the working platform is outside the tower structure, due consideration
must be given to the effect of such means of access on the stability of the scaffold. Where a sloping
ladder would cause instability, a securely fixed vertical ladder may be used.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
2.6.7.8 LIMITATIONS
Free-standing tower scaffolds erected and used in accordance with these directions and with one
working platform may be used up to a maximum height of 12 meters (40 feet) to the work platform.
Free-standing tower scaffolds departing from these directions shall be specially designed.
2.6.8 MOBILE TOWER SCAFFOLDS
The requirements for free-standing tower scaffolds in 2.6.7 also apply to mobile tower scaffolds with
the exception that wheels are used in place of base plates and sills
2.6.8.1 FOUNDATIONS
Wheels or casters, not less than 12.7 centimeters (5 inches) in diameter, and fitted with brakes,
which cannot be released accidentally, shall be securely fixed to the bases of the posts by lock pins
or dowels.
A mobile tower scaffold shall only be used and moved on surfaces sufficiently firm and level to
ensure stability. Where the scaffold is to be used on a suspended floor, it shall be designed to apply
loads no greater than the bearing capacity of the floor.
Temporary foundations or track laid on soft or uneven ground to facilitate the erection and movement
of the tower shall be constructed and anchored so that its bearing capacity is not exceeded due to
imposed loading from the tower. The track shall be level and properly secured.
2.6.8.2 OPERATION
A mobile tower scaffold shall be moved only by pushing or pulling at the base. Force must not be
applied at a height greater than 1.4 meters (4 feet, 6 inches) above the base. No men, equipment or
materials shall be on the working platform or elsewhere on the structure while it is in motion. Wheel
brakes shall be applied at all times when men are on the stationary mobile tower scaffold.
2.6.8.3 LIMITATIONS
Mobile tower scaffolds, erected and used in accordance with these directions, supported on four
wheels and with one working platform, may be used up to a maximum height of 12 meters (40 feet).
Mobile tower scaffolds departing from these directions shall be specially designed and properly
secured (See 2.6.7.5).
2.6.9 SCAFFOLDS FOR TANKS AND VESSELS
Tube and coupler scaffolds for tanks and vessels shall be secured, tying to the structure for stability.
2.6.9.1 BRACKET SCAFFOLDS
Brackets and bracket straps shall be constructed, fixed and erected in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
It is essential that the brackets, straps and welds are of sufficient strength to support the weight of
the scaffold, men, tools and materials.
The bracket straps shall be welded to the wall of the tank by a certified welder. The weld shall be a
full 5 millimeters (3/16 inch) fillet.
The weld shall be made with the same type of electrode as used for the main tank weld joints. Before
the bracket is attached to the strap, the weld shall be inspected by a competent welding inspector or
welding super-visor who will approve and accept the weld.
Brackets shall be inspected prior to each use and damaged or defective brackets shall be removed
from service. Brackets shall be vertical and horizontal spacing shall not exceed 2.5 meters (8 feet)
on centers.
A rigid guardrail system and toeboards shall be securely fixed to the uprights of the brackets (see
Section 8.4.9). Alternatively, 3/8 inch diameter wire ropes may be used in place of toprails and
midrails providing that they are securely fixed and kept taut by the use of turn buckles.
Whenever men are working, the platform shall be fully decked.
Excessive storage or accumulation of materials or platform units (planks) shall not be permitted.
The scaffold shall be designed to support a minimum load of 1.2 kPa (25 lb./sq. ft). No more than two
persons shall occupy any given 2.5 meters (8 feet) of bracket scaffold at any one time. Tools and
materials shall not exceed 34 kg (75 lb.) in addition to person(s) occupying the area.
2.6.10 SPECIAL SCAFFOLDS
Scaffolds to suit special applications and those required for unusual heights or for use in abnormal
circumstances shall be of a special design.
2.6.11 SCAFFOLD TERMINOLOGY
(1) Base Plate A metal plate with a spigot or screwjack for distributing the load from a post or
other load bearing tube.
(2) Bearer (Transom). A horizontal tube across runners to form the support for a platform or to
connect the outer posts to the inner posts.
(3) Brace. A tube placed diagonally with respect to the vertical and horizontal members of a
scaffold and fixed to them to give stability.
(4) Coupler. A device for locking together component parts of tube and coupler scaffold.
(5) Design Load. The maximum intended load; that is, the total of all loads including the
worker(s), material and the equipment placed on the unit.
(6) Dropline. A vertical line from a fixed anchorage, which is independent of the work platform and
its rigging, and to which the lanyard is affixed.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
(7) Fabricated Tubular Frame Scaffold. A system of tubular frames (panels) field erected with
bracing members.
(8) Guardrail System. A rail system erected along open sides and ends of platforms. The rail
system consists of a toprail and midrail and their supports.
(9) Lanyard. A flexible line to secure the wearer of a body belt or harness to a dropline or a fixed
anchor.
(10) Load Ratings. Maximum loading for the following categories:
(a) Heavy Duty. Scaffolding constructed to carry a working load of 75 lb./ft2 such as for
masonry work, with storage of materials on the platform.
(b) Medium Duty. Scaffolding constructed to carry a working load of 50 lb./ft2 such as for
bricklayers with the weight of materials in addition to workers.
(c) Light Duty: Scaffolding constructed to carry a working load of 25 lb./ft2 and is intended
for workers only, with no material storage other than the weight of tools.
(d) Special Duty: Scaffold designed and constructed to carry specific types of objects.
(11) Mobile Scaffold. A scaffold assembly supported by casters and moved along manually.
(12) Midrail. A horizontal rail approximately midway between the toprail and platform of a guardrail
system.
(13) Plank. A wood board or fabricated component that is a flooring member.
(14) Platform. An elevated work surface composed of one or more platform units.
(15) Platform Unit. Individual wood planks, fabricated planks, fabricated decks, and fabricated
platforms.
(16) Post (Standard). Vertical scaffold tube that bears the weight of the structure.
(17) Putlog (Truss). A fabricated tube upon which the platform rests, the putlog has a flattened
end, to rest in or on part of the brickwork.
(18) Rated Load. The manufacturer's recommended maximum load
(19) Runner (Ledger). A horizontal scaffold tube that extends from post to post, that supports
putlogs or bearers and that forms a tie between the posts.
(20) Scaffold. A temporary elevated or suspended work unit and its supporting structure used for
supporting worker(s) or materials, or both.
(21) Scaffold Access. A separate, attachable or built-in means of access to and from a scaffold or
work unit.
(22) Scaffold Deck 'Fabricated'. A work unit equipped with end hooks that engage the scaffold
bearer
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
(23) Sill (Sole Plate). A timber, concrete or metal spreader used to distribute the load from a post
or base plate to the ground.
(24) Tie. A device used between scaffold components and the building or structure to enhance
lateral stability.
(25) Toeboard. A barrier secured along the sides and the ends of a platform unit to guard against
the falling of material, tools and other loose objects.
(26) Toprail. The uppermost horizontal rail of a guardrail system.
(27) Tube and Coupler Scaffold. A scaffold system consisting of tubing that serves as posts,
bearers, braces, ties and runners, a base supporting the posts; and special couplers that
serve to connect the uprights and join the various members.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
2.7 HAND TOOLS AND POWER TOOLS
Hand tools are those tools for which the hand provides the motive force, e.g., picks, shovels, axes,
crowbars, wrenches, saws, chisels, hammers, screwdrivers, etc. It is the Supervisors duty to ensure
that his workmen are properly instructed in the selection and use of the correct tool for the job.
Tools constructed of good quality materials should always be used. Poor quality tools increase the
risk of accidents and also reduce the efficiency of work.
Power tools, however, allow many jobs to be carried out more efficiently and with greater speed and
accuracy. The correct use of power tools can only be achieved by the proper training of workmen, by
proper maintenance, and by adequate site supervision. Many accidents have occurred because
unskilled and untrained labor have been allowed to operate power tools in an incorrect manner.
2.7.1 HAND TOOLS, GENERAL
2.7.1.1 QUALITY
The finest quality tools shall be provided for all jobs where hand tools are used.
2.7.1.2 CLEANLINESS
The Supervisor shall ensure that hand tools are regularly cleaned and, where necessary, lightly oiled
as a protection against corrosion.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
2.7.1.3 REPAIR AND STORAGE
All hand tools shall be regularly inspected before and after use, and before storage. If wear or
damage is observed, the tool should be withdrawn from use for repair or disposal. The contractor
shall ensure that the storekeeper maintains a record of all tools issued, repaired, and withdrawn from
use. Proper racks and boxes shall be provided for the storage of hand tools.
9.1.4 Selection
The majority of accidents are caused by using an incorrect tool for the job. It is essential that the
correct type, size, and weight of tool should be decided upon before any work is carried out.
2.7.1.4 ELECTRICAL RISKS
All uninsulated metal tools are conductors of electricity. Where work takes place on or near electrical
operations, only properly insulated and non-conductive tools should be used. Insulation should be
checked at regular intervals by a competent electrician.
2.7.2 INDIVIDUAL HAND TOOLS, PRECAUTIONS
2.7.2.1 SCREWDRIVERS
It is essential that a screwdriver has the correct size of tip to fit the slot of the screw. If the
screwdriver fits the screw correctly, the screw will be drawn into the correct position without
unnecessary force being applied. Over-tighteningof screws can lead to possible hand injury if the
screwdriver slips.
Screwdriver shanks are not designed to withstand the twisting strain applied by a pair of pliers or
more grips in order to obtain additional leverage. On no account should screwdriver handles be
subjected to blows from a hammer or similar instrument.
Screwdrivers should never be carried in the pockets of coveralls or other clothing. A screwdriver can
produce a serious wound.
2.7.2.2 HAMMER
It is essential that the right kind of hammer be selected for the job. Hammer handles should be made
from smooth timber or be made of an integral head and shaft of steel. Hammer heads should be
secured to wooden handles with proper wedges.
2.7.2.3 CHISELS
Cutting edges should be kept sharp at all times, and the original shape and angle should be
maintained. Re-sharpened cold chisels should be suitably hardened and tempered to maintain them
in a safe working condition. The chisel heads will mushroom in use. As soon as mushrooming is
observed, the head should be reground with a slight taper around the edge to prevent chipping and
reduce the tendency to remushroom. Eye protection should be worn at all times when a cold chisel is
used.
On jobs where it is necessary to use a sledge hammer for striking the chisel, the chisel should be
held by a second person using a pair of tongs.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
Wood chisels should also be maintained in a sharp condition so that minimum pressure is exerted
when making a cut. If the chisel is to be struck, only a wooden or soft mallet should be used.
2.7.2.4 PICKS AND SHOVELS
Picks and shovels shall be maintained in a serviceable condition at all times. Shovel blades should
not be allowed to become blunt, turned, split, or jagged. Pick head points should be kept sharp and
heat-treated so that the metal wears down in use and does not splinter or chip off. Shafts of picks
and shovels should be kept free from cracks and splinters.
2.7.2.5 SPANNERS AND WRENCHES
Only spanners and adjustable wrenches of the right size should be used. When possible, use box-
end rather than adjustable wrenches. The jaw should first be checked for any sign of opening out or
splitting. Spanner and wrench lengths are graded to provide sufficient leverage on the nuts for which
they are designed.
Improvised extension to these tools is an unsafe practice and may cause the bolt thread to strip or
cause shearing of the bolt. On no account should ordinary wrenches be struck by a hammer when
tightening nuts. For heavy work of this nature, a properly designed slugging wrench should be used
2.7.2.6 PIPE WRENCHES
Pipe wrenches must be large enough for the job, the jaw teeth must be kept clean and sharp, and the
knurl, pin, and spring should be kept free from damage. Pipe wrenches should never be struck with a
hammer, nor should they be used as a hammer.
2.7.2.7 PLIERS
Pliers should only be used when there are no other tools for the job. They are meant only for gripping
around objects and should not be used as a wrench.
Care should be taken when cutting soft metal with pliers to ensure the scrap portion does not fly off
and cause injury. If wire is cut under tension, then long handled pliers should be used. Where pliers
are used for electrical work, they must be fitted with insulated handles. All pliers should be kept free
from dirt and grit, and the movable parts should be lightly lubricated.
2.7.2.8 JACKS
Jacks should be marked with rated capacity and must be heavy enough and strong enough to raise
and maintain the load. They should be placed on a firm and solid support, and the load should be
positioned on the center line of the jack.
Once a load has been raised, it must be shored or blocked. The jack should never be relied upon to
hold the raised load in position by itself. Extreme care should be taken when working under or near a
raised load.
2.7.2.9 HACKSAWS
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
The correct type of blade should be selected to suit the material to be cut. The blade should be set in
a hacksaw frame so that the teeth are pointing in the forward direction, and sufficient tension should
be applied to ensure blade is maintained rigid.
2.7.2.10 HAND SAWS
Many kinds of woodworking hand saws are available, and care should be taken to select the correct
saw. All hand saws shall be regularly examined to ensure that the saw teeth are properly set so as to
avoid binding in the timber which can cause the blade to buckle. The teeth should be kept sharp,
clean, and lightly oiled. When the saw is not in use, the blade should be protected by a slotted piece
of timber or a sheath.
Two-man saws should be operated by pulling only. The cut should be kept straight to avoid the blade
buckling. The cut should be wedged open to prevent the timber from pinching the blade.
2.7.3 POWER TOOLS, GENERAL
2.7.3.1 QUALITY
The contractor shall ensure that all portable power tools must be in accordance to the local Rules
and Regulation, are manufactured of sound materials and are free from defects and properly
grounded.
2.7.3.2 REPAIR AND STORAGE
All portable power tools shall be stored in clean, dry conditions. The Supervisor shall provide a
schedule of systematic inspection and maintenance for all power tools. All tools shall be returned to
the storekeeper at the completion of each individual job. Power tools must not be left lying around the
job site where they could be damaged.
Rotating tools should be switched off and held until rotation has completely stopped before they are
set down. Tools must be disconnected before changing bits, blades, cutters, or wheels.
Power for tools can be supplied by compressed air, explosive cartridge, or electricity. All portable
power tools must be equipped with properly functioning "dead man" switches.
2.7.4 PNEUMATIC TOOLS
2.7.4.1 GENERAL
An air compressor shall always be under the supervision of a competent person. It should always be
sited in such a place so as to have adequate ventilation. Compressors shall not be permitted to
operate in confined spaces without the provision of adequate exhaust ventilation.
All compressed air hoses shall be of the correct size to fit the tool being used. Any joint in the hoses
shall be made with a proper coupler and secured by safety wire. The hose length shall be kept as
short as possible and placed so as not to be subjected to damage.
Pneumatic tools require clean air to operate efficiently. In every line feeding a power tool, there shall
be an adequate filter and lubricator.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
During operation all air tools should be held firmly to prevent them spinning and jumping. This
pressure should be maintained during the stopping process to prevent injury to the operator's feet
and hands.
2.7.4.2 INDIVIDUAL TOOLS, PRECAUTIONS
2.7.4.2.1 Jack Hammer and Concrete Breakers
The tool bit retaining spring shall always be securely in position to prevent the bit from dropping out.
The bit must be kept sharp.
Ear, eye and foot protection shall be required when working with this type of equipment.
2.7.4.2.2 Rock Drill
It is extremely important that the operator maintains a firm grip with both hands and stands in a
balanced position. Any other method of using the tool can cause serious bodily injury.
2.7.4.2.3 Grinding Machine
This tool is probably the most misused of all the power tools. Care should always be taken to ensure
that the grinding wheel is free from defect before mounting. Any defect may cause the wheel to
disintegrate as it gains momentum.
Only persons who have been instructed in the proper selection and fitting of grinding wheels should
be allowed to install wheels on tools.
The proper size and type of wheel should be fitted to the tool so that the maximum permissible
running speed of the spindle does not exceed the maximum periphery speed displayed on the
grinding wheel. No grinding machine shall be used unless the maximum speed is clearly marked on
the case. All wheels shall be fitted with adequate guards.
Floor stand and bench mounted abrasive wheels, used for external grinding, shall be provided with
safety guards (protection hoods). The maximum angular exposure of the grinding wheel periphery
and sides shall be not more than 90°, except that when work requires contact with the wheel below
the horizontal plane of the spindle, the angular exposure shall not exceed 125°. In either case, the
exposure shall begin not more than 65° above the horizontal plane of the spindle. Safety guards shall
be strong enough to withstand the effect of a bursting wheel
Floor and bench-mounted grinders shall be provided with work rests which are rigidly supported and
readily adjustable. Such work rests shall be kept at a distance not to exceed one-eighth inch from the
surface of the wheel.
Cut type wheels used for external grinding shall be protected by either a revolving cup guard or a
band type guard. All other portable abrasive wheels used for external grinding, shall be provided with
safety guards (protection hoods) meeting the requirements of this paragraph, except as follows:
 When the work location makes it possible, a wheel equipped with safety flanges shall be used.
 When wheels 2 inches or less in diameter which are securely mounted on the end of a steel
mandrel are used.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
Portable abrasive wheels used for internal grinding shall be provided with safety flanges (protection
flanges) except as follows:
 If the wheels are entirely within the work being ground while in use.
 When wheels 2 inches or less in diameter which are securely mounted on the end of a steel
mandrel are used.
When safety guards are required, they shall be so mounted as to maintain proper alignment with the
wheel, and the guard and its fastenings shall be of sufficient strength to retain fragments of the wheel
in case of accidental breakage. The maximum angular exposure of the grinding wheel periphery and
sides shall not exceed 180°.
When safety flanges are required, they shall be used only with wheels designed to fit the flanges.
Only safety flanges of a type and design and properly assembled so as to ensure that the pieces of
the wheel will be retained in case of accidental breakage, shall be used.
All abrasive wheels shall be closely inspected and ring-tested before mounting to ensure that they are
free from cracks or defects.
Grinding wheels shall fit freely on the spindle and shall not be forced on. The spindle nut shall be
tightened only enough to hold the wheel in place.
All employees using abrasive wheels shall be protected by eye protection equipment.
Materials that require grinding shall be placed on the tool rest with moderate head-on pressure
applied. Materials should not be forced or jammed into the wheel. Grinding the materials on the sides
of the wheel is an unsafe practice which can damage the wheel. A grooved or damaged wheel must
be replaced.
1. Work rests shall be kept adjusted to the wheel with a maximum gap of 1/8 inch.
2. Tongue guards shall be kept adjusted closely to the wheel with a maximum opening of 1/4 inch.
3. The maximum angular exposure of the grinding wheel periphery should not exceed 90°. This
exposure shall begin at a point not more than 65° above the horizontal plane.
4. Whenever the nature of the work requires contact with the wheel below the horizontal plane,
the exposure shall not exceed 125°.
2.7.5 CARTRIDGE OPERATED TOOLS
2.7.5.1 GENERAL
Cartridge operated tools have a great advantage in that they can be used in almost any situation
without the inconvenience of trailing leads or hoses. However, it is essential that these tools be
operated only by properly trained personnel who are over 18 years of age. The contractor shall
ensure that each man required to operate such a tool will undergo a thorough training period and be
certified by the tool vendor.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
2.7.5.2 STORAGE
Safe and secure storage for cartridges and tools must be provided on the job site. Storage must be
fire proof, dry, must be capable of being locked and should be sited in a clear, but easily accessible
location where constant supervision can be maintained.
Cartridges and tools must not be stored together. A storage unit providing positive physical
separation of cartridges and tools (i.e., a wall or partition) is required.
Warning to be posted where cartridges are stored: "DANGER - NO SMOKING Cartridge Storage".
Ventilation must be provided in the store. Cartons of cartridges must not be stacked against the wall
and ventilation spaces must be left around the cartons. Only one carton of each strength cartridge
shall be open at any one time. All empty cartons, and intermediate packing, must be removed at
once.
Tools must be stored in their carrying cases. No loose cartridges must be in the carrying cases. all
cartridges must be in their color coded boxes.
Only authorized personnel must be allowed access to the store.
2.7.5.3 SELECTION AND TRAINING OF PERSONNEL
No person may operate, clean, maintain, or repair any cartridge tool without possessing a certificate
of competency, issued by an accredited tool vendor or manufacturer's representative, which
identifies the particular model that the person is qualified to handle.
Personnel for training must be selected with the following points in mind:
1 Must be over 18 years of age.
2 Must be physically fit and have full use of both hands and both eyes.
3 Should ideally be a tradesman, e.g. plumber, mason, electrician, joiner/carpenter, etc.
4 Storemen may also need to be trained if they are required to clean and maintain the tools
Training, both theoretical and practical, must be given by a competent instructor.

The training must follow the manufacturer's instructions as contained in the handbook of each
particular model.
2.7.5.4 PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT
Eye Protection shall be worn by the operator and his assistant whenever using the tools. Goggles
must be of a satisfactory standard designed to withstand high speed impacts and/or, penetrations.
Ear muffs will be available for use at any time and shall be used in confined spaces. Safety belts may
be required in certain situations where the recoil from the tool could cause an operator to loose his
balance.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
2.7.5.5 ISSUE AND RETURNS
A full register of the serial numbers of each tool is to be made and kept up to date.
A log inventory system of issuing and returning cartridges and tools against signatures must be
initiated and maintained.
Only personnel in possession of a user certificate will be allowed to withdraw tools or cartridges from
the store.
Only the minimum number of cartridges required for that particular shift's operation should be issued
at any one time.
Cartridges and tools must not be left on the job site at lunch break or at end of shift but must be
returned to the store for safekeeping.
Any loss, either of tools or cartridges, must be reported, at once.
Cartridge/Tool Issuance Control
Cartridge Quantity Received by

Date Issued Returned Used Returned Unused Name/signature Issued by
Warning: Above items can only be issued to workers with valid training certificate
2.7.5.6 USE
No person may operate, clean, maintain or repair any cartridge tool without possessing a certificate
of competency which identifies the particular model that person Is qualified to handle.
The manufacturer's operating instructions must be followed at all times.
Cartridges are manufactured in different calibers and strengths. There are three sizes: .25 short, .27
short, and .27 long; and, four strengths, as follows:
POWER LEVEL NUMBER COLOR CODE LETTER CODE

Low 3 Green L
Low/Medium 4 Yellow LM
Medium/High 5 Red MH
Extra High 6 Purple/Black EX
It is, therefore, imperative that the correct size and strength of cartridge required for the tool, the
fixing, and the material to be fixed onto be properly determined. A wrongly sized cartridge will cause a
stoppage or misfire.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
Using a cartridge which is too powerful could cause a ricochet or a spalling or fracture of the
material.
The following General Safety and Operating Rules are common to all types of tools:
1 As soon as the tool is removed from its carrying case, check to make sure that a cartridge is
NOT LOADED.
2 Inspect the tool before use each day to ensure that it is complete, in good condition (e.g.,
clean), and that the safety devices are in proper working condition.
3 Any tool that is not in proper working order or that develops a defect during use, shall be
immediately withdrawn from service and not used until properly repaired.
4 Tools shall not be loaded with a cartridge until just prior to the intended firing time. When
loading a tool, point it away from you and anyone else. Never walk around with a loaded tool;
load it where you are working. Never leave the tool loaded when not in use. Loaded tools shall
not be left unattended.
5 Never try to operate the tool without the end of the barrel hard against the fixing surface.
6 All tools shall be used with the correct shield, guard, or attachment recommended by the
manufacturer.
7 Fasteners shall not be driven into very hard or brittle materials including, but not limited to,
cast iron, glazed tile, surface hardened steel, glass blocks, hollow tile, terra cotta, marble,
granite, slate, etc.
8 Driving into soft or easily penetrable materials shall be avoided unless materials are backed
by another material that will prevent the pin from passing completely through and creating a
flying missile hazard on the other side. Careful inspection of all materials should be made
before deciding on the use of a cartridge tool.
9 No pins shall be driven into a spalled area caused by an unsatisfactory shot, or into any
existing hole in the material. Care should be taken to ensure that the new fixing is at least two
inches away from any previous hole, and a similar distance from any welded joint.
10 Pins must not be fired into corner bricks, mortar joints, and must be at least four (4) inches
(100 mm) away from the edge of concrete or brick work and one-half inch (12 mm) from the
edge of steel.
11 Ensure that the correct strength cartridge is used for the pin, fixing and material involved. For
the first, or test firing use the weakest cartridge. Too strong a cartridge may result in over
penetration, or the fastener may rebound or ricochet.
12 The tool must be held at right angles to the job when firing.
13 In the event of a misfire, the tool should be re-triggered without moving the tool from the work
face. If the shot again fails, then the tool must be held firmly in the firing position for at least 30
seconds to allow for a possible "Hang Fire" in the cartridge. The removal of the misfired
cartridge must be as per the manufacturer's instructions. Do not use nails, knives, etc., to pry
the cartridge loose.
14 Recoil from firing can throw an operator off balance, especially when working from ladders or
scaffolds. Care must be taken to ensure that the operator has a secure and safe work area.
Safety belts should be used if necessary.
15 Do not leave cartridges loose on the job site or in the carrying case or carry them in your
pockets. Cartridges are of the'Rim Fire'type and could explode accidentally if in receipt of a
knock from a pin, fixing, or even a bunch of keys.
16 Before returning the tool to the stores, ensure that it is clean and complete and that all
cartridges are in their correct color coded box.
2.7.5.7 MAINTENANCE AND REPAIR
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
Before any repair/maintenance work is carried out, cheek to make sure that the tool is
NOT LOADED with a cartridge.
No person may operate, clean, maintain or repair any cartridge tool without possessing a certificate
of competency which identifies the particular model that the person is qualified to handle.
Tools must be dismantled, as far as the manufacturer's instructions indicate, at least once every
week and checked for defects and excessive wear before being cleaned and oiled. If any defect is
found, the tool must be made serviceable before being issued for use.
Only manufacturer's authorized spare parts are to be used for repair/replacement.
NO CARTRIDGES must be allowed in the repair/maintenance area. Test firing of repaired tools
must be done in a safe location away from work and store or office areas.
2.7.6 ELECTRICALLY OPERATED TOOLS
2.7.6.1 GENERAL
All electrically operated hand tools shall be rated and used at a voltage not exceeding 125V to ground.
Before any electrical tool is used, a careful check shall be made by the supervisor to ensure that the
supply voltage is within the range marked on the information plate on the tool. Ground Fault Circuit
interrupters (GFCIs) are required for all 120 volt, single phase, 15 and 20 ampere receptacle outlets
on construction sites which are not a part of the permanent wiring system.
All electrical power hand tools shall be of the double insulated type or properly grounded.
External metal parts of double insulated tools (drill chucks, saw blades, etc.) are insulated from the
electrified parts inside the tool and, under normal conditions, contact with electrified parts of the tool
does not take place. However, 'under wet conditions, rain, condensation, high humidity, damp
locations, etc., the hazards are as great as with faulty grounded tools. All electrical tools are
hazardous when used damp or wet, but with double insulated tools the moisture coupled with metal
dust, carbon dust, etc. can form a conductive path from inside the tool to the surface through the
ventilation holes or cracks. Since there is no ground wire to carry this current away, the user can
receive an electric shock. Double insulated tools, like all electric tools, must be kept dry and should
not be used without a ground fault circuit interrupter.
All tools shall be used with extension cords which are as short as possible. All extension cords shall
be fitted with grounding pin and blades to fit the socket outlet on the distribution board. Extension
cords shall be of the three-wire conductor type.
Overcurrent protection shall be provided to extension cords. Factors to be considered for adequate
overcurrent protection are: type of conductors, size, and length of run.
Where it is necessary to make electrical splices, these shall be made with proper connector blocks
or by plug and socket connectors. Taped joints shall not be permitted.
2.7.6.2 MAINTENANCE AND STORAGE
A proper inspection and maintenance routine shall be established for all electrical tools. The
inspection and maintenance of all tools shall be carried out at least once in every month by a
competent electrician.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
All tools shall be stored in a clean, dry place, and a record of issue and receipt shall be maintained by
the storekeeper.
2.7.6.3 MONTHLY INSPECTIONS
A Monthly Safety Inspection will be carried out by the designated competent personnel . All monthly
inspections will documented and appropriate records maintained by the Storeman.
Monthly Colour Coding Safety Inspection
All electrical hand power tools will be colour coded after every monthly inspection by a qualified
electrician/designated competent person. Colour electrical tapes will be used for this purpose. Colour
coding system will be operated as shown below:
January MONTHLY
Blue/White COLOUR
May CODING FOR ELECTRICALSeptember
Red/Yellow HAND TOOLS Orange/Green
February White/Orange June Yellow/Blue October Green/Red
March Orange/Green July Blue/White November Red/Yellow
April Green/Red August White/Orange December Yellow/Blue
2.7.6.4 PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT
The Supervisor shall ensure that all operators are provided with eye, head, and ear protection. If there
is any likelihood of harmful dust being emitted, dust respirators should be used.
2.7.6.5 INDIVIDUAL TOOLS, PRECAUTIONS
2.7.6.5.1 Grinders
All grinders shall be equipped with a protective guard which allows only the Working part of the wheel
to be exposed. This guard must not be removed.
Grinders shall be clearly marked with their maximum running speed. The maximum running speed of
the spindle must not exceed the maximum periphery speed marked on the grinding wheel. Wheels
should be checked for defects before mounting. All defective wheels must be destroyed.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
2.7.6.5.2 Drills
Care should be taken not to drill too large a hole at one time. Drilling of large holes should be done in
stages by using small bore drills and gradually increasing the size as necessary. If this is not done,
the drill may bind on breakthrough, and the torque set up could twist the tool against the user's wrist.
2.7.6.5.3 Saws
Hand operated circular saws shall be fitted with spring loaded guards which allow only the working
part of the blade to be exposed.
Portable table saws shall be provided with adjustable guards, anti-kick-back devices, and push-type
start/stop buttons within easy reach of the operator. Fixed table saws shall be hard wired to an
emergency electrical disconnect switch that has the capability of locking out in addition to having star-
t/stop buttons at the operator's location, etc. Portable table saws must be unplugged for repair,
maintenance, or when not in use
Where a provision is made for a table saw riving knife to be fitted, it shall be kept clean and properly
adjusted to the work at all times. Push sticks must be provided and used when necessary on all
bench saws.
The work area shall be cleaned to prevent excessive build-up of sawdust and scrap wood.
Operators shall wear eye and hearing protection.
2.7.6.5.4 Radial Saws
Radial saws must be provided with:
 An upper hood to enclose the top portion of the blade down to a point that includes the end of the
saw arbor. The sides of the lower, exposed portion of the blade must be guarded to the full
diameter of the blade by a device that automatically adjusts to the thickness of the stock being
cut.
 Anti-kickback dogs (on both sides of saw) designed to provide adequate holding power for all
thicknesses of ripping stock.
 An adjustable stop limiting the forward travel of the blade beyond the distance necessary to
complete the cut in repetitive operations.
 A saw housing which automatically returns to the starting position.
 A marking on the hood showing the direction of the saw rotation. In addition, a permanent label
must be affixed to the rear of the guard, reading: "DANGER- DO NOT RIP OR PLOUGH FROM
THIS END. "
 Start/stop buttons at the operator's position. Additionally, in the case of fixed saws, each saw
must be wired to an emergency electrical disconnect isolation switch capable of locking out the
saw.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
2.7.6.5.5 Table Saws
 Table saws must be provided with a hood that covers the saw at all times.
 Table saws used for ripping must be equipped with an anti-kickback device and spreader.
 The exposed part of the saw underneath the table must be guarded.
 Table must be secured in position.
 Guarded start/stop buttons shall be provided at the operator's position.
 All fixed table saws shall be hard wired to an emergency electrical disconnect switch capable of
locking out the saw.
2.7.7 GENERAL
2.7.7.1 TRAINING:
 No person should be employed on a woodworking machine who has not been trained and
instructed in its operation.
2.7.7.2 DUTIES OF EMPLOYED PERSONS:
 Employees using woodworking machines must use and keep properly adjusted guards and other
safety devices and use push sticks, jigs, holders and backstops provided.
2.7.7.3 WORKING ENVIRONMENT:
 Sufficient space to be provided around machine to allow work without risk of injury.
 Floors to be level, in good condition, free of loose material, and not slippery.
2.7.7.4 GUARDS:
 Cutters to be guarded to the greatest practicable extent.

 Guards to be of substantial construction, properly secured and adjusted, and constantly in
position while cutters are in motion.
2.7.7.5 TOP GUARD:
 Guard to be strong and easily adjustable.

 Adjusted to extend from top of riving knife to a point as close as practicable to the surface of the
material being cut; or to a point not more than 12 mm above the material being cut where
squared stock is being hand held.
2.7.7.6 BOTTOM GUARD:
 Blade below table to be guarded to the greatest extent practicable.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
2.7.7.7 PUSH STICKS:
 Must be available for use on every hand-fed circular saw, and used to feed material-
a) throughout any cut of 300 mm or less

b) during the last 300 mm of any cut more than 300 mm in length
Push sticks should also be used to remove cut material from between the saw blade and the fence.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
2.8 PAINTS AND COATINGS
In addition to the usual hazards associated with construction activities, workmen engaged in surface
preparation and paint application can be exposed to the dangers of fire, explosion, chemical burns,
toxic fumes, dust, and insufficient air. This section of the manual discusses these hazards and how
to minimize them.
2.8.1 FLAMMABILITY HAZARDS OF COATING MATERIALS
2.8.1.1 FLAMMABLE MATERIALS
In paint systems, it is normally the organic solvent vapor that is flammable. All the solvents (except
for the water based paints) present a fire hazard.
2.8.1.2 FLASH POINT (DEFINITION)
The flash point is defined as the lowest temperature at which a liquid will give off sufficient vapor to
ignite when exposed to an open flame
2.8.1.3 FLAMMABLE (EXPLOSIVE) LIMITS (DEFINITION)
The lower and upper flammable (explosive) limits define the range of vapor/air concentrations that
are potentially explosive. The lower flammable (explosive) limit (LEL) is typically on the order of 1% to
2% by volume, a level readily obtained in the area near opened solvent containers and near the
nozzle of a spray painting gun in operation.
2.8.1.4 FIRE PRECAUTIONS
Solvents in paints constitute a significant fire and explosion hazard when in the presence of ignition
sources. No painting should be carried out within 75 feet of potential ignition sources, e.g., welding,
flame-cutting, smoking areas, or sparking tools, unless conditions warrant greater clearance.
Ventilation equipment should be used to maintain a maximum level of solvent concentration, typically
below 10% of the LEL.
All electrical lighting and equipment shall be explosion-proof when required in areas where solvent
vapors are likely to be present.
All electrical equipment such as switches, panel boards, electrical motors and associated equipment
must be de-energized before spray painting to eliminate explosion hazards.
The use and storage of flammable paints and solvents shall be kept to restricted areas and these
areas should be suitably marked with the appropriate warning signs. Flammable paints should be
kept in a special building or in a sun shelter.
Fire extinguishers should be located at the work area.
Work areas should be kept as clean as practicably possible.
2.8.2 HEALTH HAZARDS ASSOCIATED WITH PAINTS
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
Many paint ingredients are harmful to humans; most people can withstand these materials over a
short time and in small quantities. However, some people are immediately sensitive to some
ingredients and almost everyone will be affected to some degree if exposed for sufficient time.
There are two major groups of irritants: toxic materials and dermatitic or skin irritating materials
2.8.2.1 TOXIC MATERIALS
The most abundant toxic materials found in paints and coatings are solvents. Other toxic materials in
paints include pigments (lead), binders (epoxies, polyesters) and additives (organotin). Also, dust
from cleaning operations or application of the paint can generate toxic materials. These toxic
materials can enter the body through breathing, ingestion or skin absorption. Most solvents are toxic
to some degree depending on exposure. The degree of toxicity can be measured by the Permissible
Exposure Limit (PEL) expressed as parts per million (ppm) or milligrams of particulate per cubic
meter (mg/M³) of solvent in air over an exposure of 8 hours a day five days a week with no ill effects.
2.8.2.2 DERMATITIC MATERIALS
Dermatitic materials irritate the skin which, if left untreated, can cause infections or ulcerations.
Solvents have a tendency to dissolve and remove natural oils and fats from skin. Certain binders
such as epoxy resins may also irritate the skin.
Other chemicals used in paint related work should be handled with care (e.g. paint removers, acid
and alkaline cleaners).
2.8.2.3 PREVENTION OF HEALTH HAZARDS
Many solvents and coatings contain hazardous ingredients. A copy of the appropriate Material Safety
Data Sheet (MSDS) should be obtained for all materials used, studied carefully, and the required
safety precautions implemented. The following precautions should minimize health hazards:
 Identify and seal all toxic and dermatitic materials when not in use.
 Adequately ventilate all painting areas and provide respiratory protection where necessary. All
workmen spray painting shall wear chemical cartridge respirators or airline hoods depending
upon the hazards of the paint.
 Minimize dust during surface preparation, and dispose of coating.
 Wear the appropriate personnel protective equipment for the work being carried out.
 Avoid touching any part of the body and wear protective equipment (e.g. gloves, suits, etc.) when
handling dermatitic materials. Personnel involved in painting shall wash thoroughly before eating
and at the end of the day.
 Use ventilation control or respirators when working with paint removers containing toxic solvents.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
2.8.3 VENTILATION IN CONFINED SPACES
A supply of clean air is a necessity for all operations involving the application of coating materials, and
the paint curing/drying process. A high quality air supply Is also required for life support. Ventilation is
a necessity when painting in confined areas because solvents tend to be heavier than air and migrate
to lower levels. The fresh air inlet of the ventilation system should be located near the top of the
confined space, and the discharge should be located near the bottom, positioned to eliminate dead
air spaces. Supplementary fans may be necessary to ensure good air circulation.
Natural ventilation through open man ways, etc. is rarely sufficient to keep local vapor concentrations
to a safe level in terms of PELs or LELs. As a general rule, forced ventilation shall be used, especially
in small enclosures and always during spray painting.
Ventilation requirements are proportionally greater for vessels with a capacity smaller than 1580 m3
(10,000 BBL's or 56,000 cu ft).
Ventilating to 10% of the LEL considerably reduces the likelihood of fire or explosion; however, this
level will no doubt exceed the Permissible Exposure Limits for toxic materials. Hence, supplied air
respiratory protection is required in confined spaces.
The preparation of air used for life support involves the following factors: PEL's of nuisance and toxic
dusts; fume, gas and vapor content; air temperature.
VENTILATION REQUIREMENTS FOR CONFINED SPACES
Volume of Confined Area Required Air Mover Capacity

m³ BBL L/s cfm
16 100 472 1000
80 500 1180 2500
160 1000 2360 5000
800 5000 4720 10000
1600 10000 7080 15000
4000 + 25000 + 9440 20000
2.8.4 SURFACE PREPARATION
Equipment and materials that are used in surface preparation for paints and coatings can be
hazardous if used carelessly. There are several methods for preparing surfaces and these include:
 Blast cleaning where abrasives in the form of sand, iron shot, grit, slag, etc. are used. Other
types of blast cleaning use high pressure water or steam.
 Hand or power tool cleaning includes grinders, sanders, rotary wire brushes, impact tools,
chisels, hammers.
 Chemical cleaning using paint removers, or solvents, alkali, acids or detergents.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
2.8.4.1 ABRASIVE BLAST CLEANING
This section covers blast cleaning using abrasives in the form of sand, iron shot, grit, slag or similar
materials.
Abrasive blast cleaning operators shall have pre-placement physical examinations, including chest X-
ray and pulmonary function tests with repeat tests at least every two years.
The abrasive blast cleaning operator shall wear an air supplied protective hood approved for the type
of abrasive material being used and any other toxic contaminants (lead, zinc, etc.) that are present.
Where blast cleaning assistants could be exposed to silica sand dust or toxic contaminants, then self-
contained or air supplied breathing apparatus shall be worn by the assistant. Personnel (e.g.
maintenance, workers handling abrasive supplies or clean up crews) within the range of rebound
abrasive contaminants shall wear approved dustfilter respirators for the specific airborne hazards.
A bonding system that bonds nozzle, hose, blasting equipment and the material being cleaned shall
be provided, and this bonding system shall be grounded to prevent a build up of static charges.
Ground continuity tests shall be conducted periodically to ensure proper grounding.
2.8.4.2 HYDROBLAST AND STEAM CLEANING
Hydroblast cleaning uses a high pressure ambient temperature waterjet and steam cleaning uses a
high pressure and high temperature steam jet. Extra caution should be exercised when using such
equipment. These types of equipment are used for removing dirt or rust scales and the personal
protective equipment requirements are shown in para 1.10.7
2.8.4.3 HAND AND POWER TOOL CLEANING
This section briefly covers the safety aspects of hand and power tools used for surface preparation.
Particular attention should be paid to eye protection to guard against flying particles, and where
necessary, ear protection should be provided.
Tools should be correctly selected for the purpose, and also operated and maintained to the
manufacturer's instructions.
Suitable respirators should be used if contaminant levels exceed Permissible Exposure Limits.
Extreme care should be used if tools have the ability to create sparks.
2.8.4.4 CHEMICAL CLEANING
This section is concerned with four types of chemical cleaners (organic solvents, alkalines, acids
and detergents) used to assist in the removal of surface contaminants such as light oils, greases
and rust.
Solvents such as kerosene, mineral spirits, and turpentine are used to dissolve and remove oil
contaminants. Hazards associated with solvents include their flammable, toxic and dermatitic
characteristics.
Alkaline cleaners are composed of highly alkaline salts with wetting agents and/or soaps. They
function by wetting, emulsifying, dispersing and solubilizing surface contaminants, and are generally
used at elevated temperatures.
Acid cleaners are generally composed of strong acids. They remove contaminants by chemical
attack and are primarily used to remove metal scales such as rust.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
Detergent cleaners are comparable to alkaline cleaners except they are generally used at low
temperatures (60 to 100 degrees Celsius).
For all of the above chemical cleaners, personal safety precautions must be taken to protect
personnel from materials and conditions that present fire hazards or cause personnel to experience
dermatitic or toxic effects (such as inhalation effects, skin burns, or eye irritants).
When using chemical cleaners, appropriate eye and body wash facilities shall be available in the
immediate area to minimize the effects of chemical burns in the event of an accident.
Chemical cleaning agents such as solvents shall not be used for cleaning personnel.
The following solvents shall not be used for cleaning purposes due to the very toxic nature: benzene,
gasoline, carbon tetrachloride, and chlorinated hydrocarbons.
2.8.4.5 GENERAL SAFETY IN SURFACE PREPARATION
Instruction and training of operators about correct use of the cleaning agents and equipment are
essential.
Surfaces other than those receiving preparation should be protected from damage due to cleaning
operations.
Where operators are using equipment such as blast cleaners or power tools, they must have safe
footing. Extra caution should be taken on scaffoldings.
Never point a cleaning gun or nozzle at anyone or any part of your body.
Equipment such as blast guns and power tools must have automatic controls that shut off the flow of
abrasive and propellant if for any reason the operator releases the control switch
Power tools should be properly grounded to prevent electric shock.
All manufacturers recommendations on protective guards shall be implemented.
Fire and explosion hazards always exist when using solvents, especially in confined areas. Adequate
ventilation must be provided.
2.8.5 PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT
Personal protective equipment is required for the majority of operations that involve surface
preparation or paint application. The amount and type of personal protection depends on the work
being carried out and the location.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
2.8.6 PAINT APPLICATION
There are numerous hazards associated with paint application and this section is concerned with air
and airless spraying, together with brush and roller painting.
2.8.6.1 PAINT MATERIALS
The majority of paint solvents, many pigments and some binders are toxic in addition to having
potential dermatitic hazards. Refer to the Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for information
concerning the hazards associated with their use.
In that, solvent based painting materials also present a fire and explosion hazards, painting shall not
be carried out near an ignition source. Also, additional care should be taken to provide adequate
ventilation in confined spaces.
Spraying paint using air or airless systems can be very hazardous and should only be used by
trained operators.
2.8.6.2 GENERAL SAFETY IN PAINT APPLICATION
All personnel involved with the application of paint to surfaces should wear the appropriate personal
protective equipment for the work being carried out at a given location.
All pressurized equipment should be handled carefully. Operators and their assistants should know
how to operate and de-energize the equipment in accordance to manufacturer's recommendations.
No spray gun should be pointed at anyone or part of the user's body.
The spray painting operation should be conducted from the upwind side of the object being coated,
wherever practicable.
Before using airless spray equipment, all guards recommended by the manufacturer shall be in place
and the system shall be in good order and correctly grounded to prevent static build-up.
Prompt professional medical aid shall be available to any person receiving paint injuries.
The area around spray painting activity should be enclosed by hardboard fence or equivalent to
protect outside personnel from paint over spray.
2.8.6.3 SCAFFOLDING AND LADDERS
Only good condition, correctly erected equipment shall be used that meets industry standards (ANSI)
or equivalent. Users and erectors of such equipment should be trained about its use and limitations.
2.8.6.4 TARRING OPERATIONS
Tarring operations are commonly used in roof work, and hazards associated with this type of work
include body burns, fire and toxicity. Precautions that are required for tar operations include:
 The heating of tar shall not be carried out on roof tops or in similar potentially hazardous
locations.
 Tar heating operations shall be carried out using approved fuel gas in the correct cylinders. The
heating operations shall be at ground level and at a minimum distance of 4.5 m (15 feet) away
from fuel gas cylinders, buildings or similar structures.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
 The transferring of hot tar to its required location shall be carried out using the safest mode of
transport available (preferably pumped). Lifting of hot asphalt in buckets is not allowed.
 The temperature of the asphalt shall be monitored with a temperature gauge and must not
exceed 450°F at any time during the tarring operations.
In addition to personal protective equipment (safety shoes, safety glasses and hard hats), the
following shall be provided for all personnel directly involved in tar operations: face shields, leather
gloves, cotton overalls, and heat resistant aprons. Also, respiration protection may be required in
confined spaces.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
2.8.7 GENERAL SAFETY FOR PAINTS AND COATINGS
This section is provided to highlight areas of paints and coating operations not covered under
an individual sub-heading.
 Personal Protective Equipment - Depending on the work being carried out and its location,
appropriate personal protective equipment must be worn that meets the manufacturers
requirements. Personal protective equipment shall be in good condition.
 Blast Cleaning - Abrasive blast cleaning equipment and abrasive materials shall be suitable for
the work to be carried out.
 Signs and Barricades - Areas where hazardous work is being carried out (such as abrasive blast
cleaning and airless spraying) shall be suitably barricaded to keep personnel out of the hazardous
area, or the timing of the work shall be such that only the work crew doing the job is present at the
site, or a lookout is posted around the site. Warning signs shall be posted in hazardous areas
with suitable warnings of the potential dangers (i.e., "No entry, sand blasting in progress").
 Paints and Solvents - The amount of paints and solvents stored at the site shall be restricted to a
day's requirements, Bulk storage of paints and solvents shall be in a designated, well marked
safe area away from the work area and protected from the sun's heat.
 Equipment - Before any equipment is used, operators and assistants shall be trained on the
equipment's use and operation. Also, the equipment shall be in good working order, have an
automatic shut-off system and all safety guards installed.
 Personal Health - Personnel involved with using paints, solvents and cleaning equipment (i.e.,
sand blasting) shall be in good health.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
2.9 CONCRETE, CONCRETE FORMS, AND SHORING
2.9.1 GENERAL
All equipment and materials used in concrete construction and masonry work shall meet the
applicable requirements for design, construction, inspection, testing, maintenance, and operations.
2.9.2 REINFORCING STEEL
Employees working more than 1.8 meters (6 feet) above any adjacent working surfaces, placing and
tying reinforcing steel in walls, piers, columns, etc., shall be provided with proper work platforms with
a guardrail system. When work is to be accomplished outside a work platform, a safety belt shall be
worn that is securely fixed to a dropline or anchor.
Employees shall not be permitted to work above vertically protruding reinforcing steel unless it has
been bent over or capped.
Guying: Reinforcing steel for walls, piers, columns, and similar vertical form work structures shall be
guyed and supported to prevent collapse and to guard against possible wind pressures. Wire mesh
rolls. Wire mesh rolls shall be secured at each end to prevent dangerous recoiling action,
2.9.3 BULK CONCRETE HANDLING
Bulk storage bins, containers, or silos shall have conical or tapered bottoms with mechanical or
pneumatic means of starting the flow of material.
2.9.4 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
2.9.4.1 CONCRETE MIXERS
Concrete mixers equipped with 0.75 cubic meter (1 cubic yard) or larger loading skips shall be
equipped with a mechanical device to clear the skip of concrete.
2.9.4.2 GUARDRAILS
Mixers of 0.75 cubic meter (1 cubic yard) capacity or greater shall be equipped with protective
guardrails installed on each side of the skip.
2.9.4.3 BULL FLOATS
Handles on bull floats, used where they may contact energized electrical conductors, shall be
constructed of non-conductive material, or insulated with a non-conductive sheath whose electrical
and mechanical characteristics provide the equivalent protection to a handle constructed of non-
conductive material.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
2.9.4.4 POWERED CONCRETE TROWELS
Powered and rotating-type concrete troweling machines that are manually guided shall be equipped
with a control switch that will automatically shut off the power whenever the operator removes his
hands from the equipment handles. The rotating blades shall be guarded at the top and outer
perimeter.
2.9.4.5 CONCRETE BUGGIES
Handles of buggies shall not extend beyond the wheels on either side of the buggy. Installation of
knuckle guards on buggy handles is recommended to protect the hands.
2.9.4.6 PUMPCRETE SYSTEMS
Pumpcrete or similar systems using discharge pipes shall be provided with pipe supports designed
for 100 percent overload. Compressed air hose in such systems shall be provided with positive fail-
safe joint connectors to prevent separation of sections when pressurized.
2.9.4.7 CONCRETE BUCKETS
Concrete buckets equipped with hydraulic or pneumatically operated gates shall have positive safety
latches or similar safety devices installed. Prevent aggregate and loose material from accumulating
on the top and sides of the bucket.
Riding of concrete buckets for any purpose shall be prohibited, and vibrator crews shall be kept out
from under concrete buckets suspended from cranes or cable ways.
2.9.4.8 DISCHARGING ON SLOPE
When discharging on a slope, the wheels of ready-mix trucks shall be blocked and the brakes set to
prevent movement.
2.9.4.9 BACK-UP MAN, TRUCK SPOTTER
Back-up man, ready-mix truck spotter shall be used to back ready-mix trucks.
2.9.4.10 PNEUMATIC HOSE
Nozzleman applying a cement, sand, and water mixture through a pneumatic hose shall be required
to wear protective head and face equipment.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
2.9.5 VERTICAL SHORING
2.9.5.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
When temporary storage of reinforcing rods, material, or equipment on top of form work becomes
necessary, these areas shall be strengthened, shored to meet the intended loads.
The sills for shoring shall be sound, rigid, and capable of carrying the maximum intended load.
All shoring equipment shall be inspected prior to erection to determine that it is as specified in the
shoring layout. Any equipment found to be damaged shall not be used for shoring.
Erected shoring equipment shall be inspected immediately prior to and immediately after the
placement of concrete. Any shoring equipment that is found to be damaged or weakened shall be
immediately reinforced or re-shored.
Re-shoring shall be provided when necessary to safely support slabs and beams after stripping, or
where such members are subjected to superimposed loads due to construction work done.
2.9.5.2 TUBULAR WELDED FRAME SHORING
Metal tubular frames used for shoring shall not be loaded beyond the safe working load
recommended by the manufacturer.
All locking devices on frames and braces shall be in good working order; coupling pins shall align the
frame or panel legs; pivoted cross braces shall have their center pivot in place; and all components
shall be in a condition similar to that of original manufacture.
When checking the erected shoring frames with the shoring layout, the spacing between towers and
cross brace spacing shall not exceed that shown on the layout, and all locking devices shall be in the
closed position.
Devices for attaching the external lateral stability bracing shall be securely fastened to the legs of the
shoring frames.
All base plates, shore heads, extension devices, or adjustment screws shall be in firm contact with
the footing sill and the form.
2.9.6 FORMS AND SHORING
2.9.6.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS

Form work and shoring shall be designed, erected, supported, braced, and maintained so that it will
safely support all vertical and lateral loads that may be imposed upon it during placement of concrete.
Personnel shall not be allowed under or in close proximity of the form work during pour operations.
Personnel not engaged in the pour operation shall stay clear of the pour area. A clear area shall be
maintained at 1- 1/2 times the highest point of the form work.
Drawings or plans showing the jack layout, form work, shoring, working decks, and scaffolding, shall
be available at the job site.
Stripped forms and shoring shall be removed and stockpiled promptly after stripping, in all areas in
which persons are required to work or pass. Protruding nails, wire ties, and other form accessories
not necessary to subsequent work shall be pulled, cut, or other means taken to eliminate the hazard.
Imposition of any construction loads on the partially completed structure shall not be permitted unless
such loading has been considered in the design and approved by the engineer-architect.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
2.9.6.2 VERTICAL SLIP FORMS
The steel rods or pipe on which the jacks climb or by which the forms are lifted shall be specifically
designed for the purpose. Such rods shall be adequately braced where not encased in concrete.
Jacks and vertical supports shall be positioned in such a manner that the vertical loads are
distributed equally and do not exceed the capacity of the jacks.
The jacks or other lifting devices shall be provided with mechanical dogs or other automatic holding
devices to provide protection in case of failure of the power supply of the lifting mechanism.
Lifting shall proceed steadily and uniformly and shall not exceed the predetermined safe rate of lift or
concrete cure.
Lateral and diagonal bracing of the forms shall be provided to prevent excessive distortion of the
structure during the jacking operation.
During jacking operations, the form structure shall be maintained in line and plumb.
All vertical lift forms shall be provided with scaffolding or work platforms completely encircling the
area of placement with intermittent tie breaks to ensure that superimposed loads on the scaffold/work
platforms cannot pull down the entire scaffold works.
2.9.6.3 TUBE AND COUPLER SHORING
Couplers (clamps) shall not be used if they are deformed, broken, or have defective or missing
threads on bolts, or other defects.
The material used for the couplers (clamps) shall be of a structural type such as dropforged steel,
malleable iron, or structural grade aluminum. Gray cast iron shall not be used.
When checking the erected shoring towers with the shoring layout, the spacing between posts shall
not exceed that shown on the layout, and all interlocking of tubular members and tightness of
couplers shall be checked.
All base plates, shore heads, extension devices, or adjustment screws shall be in firm contact with
the footing sill and the form material and shall be snug against the posts.
2.9.6.4 SINGLE POST SHORES
For stability, single post shores shall be horizontally braced in both the longitudinal and transverse
directions, and diagonal bracing shall also be installed. Such bracing shall be installed as the shores
are being erected.
All base plates or shore heads of single post shores shall be in firm contact with the footing sill and
the form materials.
Whenever single post shores are used in more than one tier, the layout shall be designed and
inspected by a structural engineer.
When form work is at an angle, or sloping, or when the surface shored is sloping, the shoring shall
be designed for such loading.
Adjustment of single post shores to raise form work shall not be made after concrete is in place.
Fabricated single post shores shall not be used if heavily rusted, bent, dented, rewelded, or having
broken weldments or other defects. If they contain timber, they shall not be used if timber is split, cut,
has sections removed, is rotten, or otherwise structurally damaged.
All timber and adjusting devices to be used for adjustable timber single post shores shall be
inspected before erection.
Timber shall not be used if it is split, cut, has sections removed. is rotten, or is otherwise structurally
damaged.
Adjusting devices shall not be used if heavily rusted, bent, dented, re-welded, or having broken
weldments or other defects.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
All nails used to secure bracing or adjustable timber single post shores shall be driven
home and the point of the nail bent over if possible.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
3. PART 3 - MECHANICAL
3.1 GENERAL
3.1.1 WELDING, CUTTING, AND BRAZING
This section outlines the principles involved and the precautions to be taken in gas welding, cutting,
and brazing and electric arc welding operations.
Welding/cutting are safe operations if carried out in the correct manner. Where equipment is
defective or there is no well-arranged, well-lit, or properly ventilated working place, hazards can arise.
3.1.1.1 GAS WELDING: OXY-ACETYLENE EQUIPMENT AND USE
Personnel working with welding equipment shall be trained, competent, and provided with personal
protection equipment. Welding goggles, helmets, screens, forced ventilation and similar equipment
shall be provided to all workers and to trainees in the immediate area.
3.1.1.1.1 Gases
Oxygen (02) is odorless. It can promote rapid combustion, therefore, grease and oil
must never be used near oxygen as this could cause fire.
Oxygen cylinders or apparatus shall not be handled with oily hands or gloves. A jet of oxygen must
never be permitted to strike an oily surface, greasy clothes or enter fuel, oil or other storage tanks.
Acetylene (C2H2) has a distinct odor often likened to that of garlic or sour apples. It
is combustible when mixed with air over a wide range (2.5% - 8 1%). Acetylene burned with oxygen
can produce a higher flame temperature than any other commercial gas.
Acetylene becomes unstable at pressures above 103 kPa (15 psig) which means it may explode.
Under no conditions shall acetylene be generated, piped (except in approved cylinder manifolds) or
utilized at a pressure in excess of 15 psi gauge pressure. Inside the cylinder, acetylene is dissolved
in acetone to prevent internal explosion; therefore, it is essential that acetylene cylinders be stored,
handled, and used in the vertical position to prevent the liquid acetone from escaping and damaging
the valves and other equipment.
Warning: Regulated Acetylene pressures must never be allowed to exceed 103 kPa (15 psig) or
it may explode.
3.1.1.1.2 Color Coding of Cylinders
Color coding can be of great help but also a potential source of danger as there is no internationally
recognized standard color code. Refer to Clients color coding requirements.
3.1.1.1.3 Storage Of Cylinders
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
Cylinders should be stored in a safe, dry, well-ventilated place prepared and reserved for that
purpose. Flammable substances such as oil and volatile liquids or corrosive substances should not
be stored in the same area. Oxygen cylinders and flammable gas cylinders shall be stored
separately, at least 6.6 meters (20 feet) apart or separated by a fire proof, 1.6 meters (5 feet) high
partition.
All storage areas shall have "No Smoking Permitted" signs prominently displayed.
All cylinders should be chained or otherwise secured in an upright position. To prevent rusting,
cylinders stored in the open should be protected from ground contact, extremes of weather, or
contact with water. Valve caps shall be kept in place when cylinders are not in use. Flammable
substances shall not be stored within 50 feet of cylinder storage areas.
Cylinders shall not be stored at temperatures exceeding 54°C (130°F). Accordingly, they should not
be stored near sources of heat such as radiators, furnaces, or near highly flammable substances like
gasoline. Cylinders shall be stored out of the direct rays of the sun, in protective enclosures or sun
shelters.
Cylinder storage should be planned so that cylinders will be used in the order in which they are
received from the supplier. Empty and full cylinders must be stored separately with empty cylinders
plainly marked as such, to avoid confusion. Empty cylinders should be segregated according to the
type of gas they have held.
All cylinder rider storage rooms shall be ventilated sufficiently so that explosive concentrations of gas
cannot accumulate. Smoking or any other source of ignition shall be prohibited near storage areas,
and appropriately marked "No Smoking". All wiring shall be in conduit and electric switches shall be
located outside the room. All electrical installations shall meet the National Electrical Code (NFPA 70)
for hazardous areas.
3.1.1.1.4 Handling of Cylinders
Serious accidents may result from the misuse, abuse, or mishandling of cylinders.
Cylinders should never be lifted by their valves since the valves are not designed to take such stress.
When the cylinder is not in use, the valve shall be protected with the valve cap
All valves must be fully closed before a cylinder is moved. Unless a trolley or special carrier is used,
regulators and hoses should be detached from the cylinders, for moving.
If cylinders are to be lifted by a crane, specially designed bottle holders with lifting eyes should be
used. Chain and wire rope slings can allow cylinder to slip. Where a trolley is to be used for slinging,
its base should be strong enough to take the weight of the cylinders. Do not lift a cylinder with an
electromagnet.
Cylinders in transit on vehicles shall have valve caps in place and be firmly secured to prevent
movement. Cylinders shall be secured to avoid any violent contact. Loading and unloading shall take
place carefully. Cylinders shall not be dropped, thrown, dragged, used as rollers, or as a support. No
damaged or defective cylinder shall be used.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
Depleted cylinders shall be returned to the supplier with the valves closed and the valve protection
caps in place. Cylinders, even those marked empty, should be treated as a possible hazard and
handled with great care as they still contain some gas.
3.1.1.1.5 Inspecting Equipment
All equipment should be examined immediately before use and regularly maintained. All welding
operations shall be conducted in well ventilated areas.
Only soapy water should be used to check for leaks. Presence of a leak is often indicated by a
hissing sound or unusual changes in the torch flame. Cylinders and valves should be kept clean.
Valve sockets shall be kept free of grit, dirt, grease or oil.
Hoses should be used for one type of gas only and color coded for identification. They should be
examined before use for any signs of splitting which might give rise to leakage. All connections
should be made by clips or crimps. The hoses used for acetylene and for oxygen shall not be
interchangeable.
Connections and check valves should be regularly examined. Equipment should be fitted with the
correct pressure regulators and a regular check should be made to ensure that the regulator is
working properly. The torch nozzle should be kept closed.
An acetylene cylinder valve wrench shall be available at all times for the cylinder in use.
Means of torch ignition should be readily available. A friction lighter shall be used for this purpose.
Acetylene can form explosive compounds in contact with certain metals or alloys, particularly
unalloyed copper or silver. Joint fittings or lines made of copper should not be used and acetylene
should not be allowed to come into contact with copper pipe work or tubing. Only approved materials
shall be used for acetylene systems.
It is dangerous to let the torch flame come into contact with gas cylinders or for the lighted torch itself
to be left unattended. Torches shall never be sat down while lit. It is equally dangerous to rest
blowpipes, even extinguished ones, on old drums. "Empty" drums which have contained low flash
point liquids are known to have become lethal bombs when a hot welding torch was laid down on
them.
Cylinders in use should be kept upright on a custom-built stand with a bracket to accommodate the
hoses and equipment or otherwise secured. The metal cap should be kept in place to protect them
when the cylinder is not connected for use.
3.1.1.1.6 Faults
It is not uncommon for minor "explosions" to occur during welding or cutting. Most are more
frightening than harmful, but some can lead to very dangerous conditions. There are four general
groupings of these faults:
1 Snapout can occur during use when:
 Both regulators are set at an incorrect pressure
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
 Torch nozzle obstructed

 Nozzle held too close to the work
Corrective action:
 Completely shut both torch valves

 Check regulator setting
 Check cylinder pressures
 Check nozzles
 Re-light
 Ensure adequate gas flow
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
2 Backfire can occur on lighting up when:
 Regulators not set to correct pressure

 Light applied before flow of gas mixture properly established
Corrective action:
 Close both torch valves, oxygen first

 Check cylinder pressures
 Check and adjust regulator settings
 Cool torch and check nozzle orifice for obstruction
 Re-light
3 A flashback is very dangerous. Flashback is caused by gases being mixed in the

hose(s). Usually this mixing of gases occurs when the hoses have been disconnected
from regulators or torches or when a new hose is being used for the first time.
Sometimes it is due to loose connections. Usually one of the hoses will have burst and
possibly ignited.
Preventive action:
 Use flashback flame arrestors for regulator and torch

 Ensure all connections are tight
 Ensure cylinder valves are open and torch valves closed
 Set regulators to the required pressures
 Purge each hose separately and consecutively by opening the torch valve and allowing
gas to flow for sufficient time to ensure only pure gas remains in the hoses
 Close the valve for each gas as the purge is completed
 This purge should be carried out only in the open or in extremely well-ventilated areas
Corrective action:
 Close both torch valves

 Close both cylinder valves
 Extinguish hose if alight
 Repair equipment and hoses
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
3.1.1.1.7 Fuel Gas and Oxygen Manifolds
Fuel gas and oxygen manifolds shall bear the name of the substance they contain in letters at least 1
-inch high which shall be either painted on the manifold or on a sign permanently attached to it.
Fuel gas and oxygen manifolds shall be placed in safe, well ventilated, and accessible locations.
They shall not be located within enclosed spaces.
Manifold hose connections, including both ends of the supply hose that lead to the manifold, shall be
such that the hose cannot be interchanged between fuel gas and oxygen manifolds and supply
header connections. Adapters shall not be used to permit the interchange of hose. Hose connections
shall be kept free of grease and oil.
When not in use, manifold and header hose connections shall be capped
Nothing shall be placed on top of a manifold, when in use, which will damage the manifold or interfere
with the quick closing of the valves.
3.1.1.2 ELECTRIC ARC WELDING
Arc welding is a process for joining metals by heating with an electric arc. For arc welding, two
welding leads, the electrode lead and the work lead, are required.
3.1.1.2.1 Voltage
The voltage across the welding arc is normally within the range 20-40V. The voltage supplied,
however, needs to be somewhat higher so that means of stabilizing and regulating the arc current
can be introduced into the circuit. Using DC, a 60-80V supply will usually suffice. Using AC, an 80-
85V supply will suffice although some of the latest techniques need an open circuit voltage of up to
100 V between electrode and work. It should be remembered that a nominal 100 V supply has, in fact,
a peak voltage of 141 V.
For these reasons, DC should be used for welding operations in any situation where the effect of
electric shock is likely to be extreme, such as in damp and confined spaces (tanks, boilers, etc.).
3.1.1.2.2 Welding Connections
In each welding circuit there are three main connections:
1) the welding lead;

2) the welding return.
3) the welding ground.
The welding lead is the conductor carrying the welding current from the point of supply to the
electrode holder.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
The welding return is the conductor carrying the current back from the work to the point of supply. Its
conductivity should at least equal that of the welding lead. The welding return should be used to
ground the metal case of the welding machine. This high current capacity is essential, because all
the current fed to the arc has to be conducted back to the supply point. The current involved could be
as high as 300 amperes on a hand welding operation.
A continuous welding ground is essential and indispensable for conductors since electric currents as
low as 50 milliamperes can be fatal. The ground should be of low impedance so that there can be no
rise in the potential of the work and so that sufficient fault current passes quickly enough to cut off the
supply if necessary. It is recommended that the welding ground be bonded to the ground of the main
supply system by a separate substantial conductor.
The frames of all fixed arc welding and cutting machines shall be grounded either through a third wire
in the cable containing the circuit conductor or through a separate wire which is grounded at the
source of the current.
Welding grounds and returns should be securely attached to the work by cable lugs, by clamps in the
case of stranded conductors, or by bolts for strip conductors. Bolts are unsatisfactory for stranded
conductors, since the strands can loosen under the bolt head and become detached (see
Manufacturers Grounding Specifications for Electrically Powered Equipment and Engine Powered
Equipment).
Welding cable insulation needs to be abrasion resistant to withstand normal treatment over rough
ground and the wear inflicted by foot and vehicular traffic. Where feasible, cables should be
additionally protected by stringing overhead or by using cable covers. They should be regularly
examined for cuts or abrasions to the insulation; damaged cable shall not be used. If joints become
necessary, standard plug and socket coupling shall be used. Holders should be unplugged when not
in use. If joints become necessary, standard plug and socket couplings shall be used. Splices are not
allowed in welding cables.
Electrode holders shall be constructed to accommodate all sizes of electrodes and with an ejector
for hot, spent stubs.
A shield should be fitted between electrode holder and handle to prevent live elements from being
touched. The handle itself shall be made of non-flammable insulating material and be free from joints
or holes.
3.1.1.2.3 Auxiliary Power Outlets
Most welding machines are furnished with an alternator which produces 3 KVA of 115 and 23 0 volts.
As a safety factor, all power hand tools which are not double insulated should be grounded to the
welder frame. Ground Fault Interrupters are required, where power output exceeds 5 KV. Placards
must be placed on the welding machine.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
3.1.1.3 PROTECTIVE MEASURES
The need for the operator to take safety precautions and preventive measures during the operation of
welding machines to ensure that no safety-related incident occurs cannot be overemphasized. The
following is a list of precautions and operating considerations to take into account when operating a
400 amp arc welding machine, for example. All users are strongly encouraged to read the
equipment's operating manual to ensure reliable and safe operation.
1 Keep all doors, covers and panels in place when operating the machine~ the arc welding
machine is designed to operate with all its doors, covers and panels in place. They ensure the
optimum flow of cooling air, and removal of these covers and panels will reduce the cooling of
the engine and generator, resulting in overheating and premature failure of the unit.
2. Ensure that the engine protection push button'pops out'when the engine is switched off. Under
normal circumstances, this button will 'pop out' once the engine is switched off. However, if
the unit becomes clogged with dirt, dust or sand, it may not return to its 'off position without
assistance. If the button remains depressed, it will quickly drain the unit's battery. The
resulting failure to start will delay your work while a new battery is fitted, a 'jump start'
arranged, or a recharge cycle is completed.
3. Maintain welding and ground cables and connections in good condition. A major source of
safety hazards, poor and inconsistent welding performance, and loss of point of-use welder
capacity is a set of welder leads in poor condition, or of the wrong size for the length of cable
being run. Other sources of safety hazards related to cables and connections are:
 cracked insulation is an obvious source of hazard producing shorts to ground eventually

leading to increase of conductor resistance. With no-load voltages approaching 100+
volts, significant hazard of electrocution to personnel exists, especially in wet areas or
when working on metal structures.
 combining sets of low capacity cables to reach a distant welding site can greatly reduce
the effective welding power available to the welding machine. Larger-capacity cables
must be used to reach distant sites, because of the buildup of resistance from the extra
length of the leads. Inadequate or weak cable connections can also introduce sparking
hazards, potential shorts to ground, and extra resistance which reduces effective
welding machine capacity. Cable sizes and lengths must be as recommended by the
manufacturer, as follows (for 400 amp machine):
Combined length of electrode and work cable Minimum Cable Size

up to 150 feet 2/0
150-200 feet 3/0
200-250 feet 4/0
4. When welding is in progress, the full length of cable must be stretched out on the ground.
Leaving the cable coiled on the machine alters the current flow and disrupts the welding
process.
5. Do not adjust the'current control'while welding is in progress. This can damage the control.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
Sparks and molten or hot metal coming from the work area can easily set fire to combustible
materials near or below the working area. Wherever possible, all combustible material should be
removed from the work area. If it cannot be removed, it should be covered with fireproof material.
Gas cylinders should be protected from failing sparks.
Operators of arc welding equipment must always switch off the current to the electrode holder and
remove the electrode whenever it is to be set down and is not actually in use.
When welding or cutting material that is supported by a crane, a shield or an effective screen should
be provided to protect the suspension ropes or chains. Grounding cables shall only be connected to
the work, not to the crane or rigging.
Forced ventilation shall be arranged wherever work is to be carried out in a confined area. Suitable
metal bins shall be provided for spent electrode stubs as they are usually hot when discarded and
can easily cause a fire. Dry chemical fire extinguishers should be kept available while work is in
progress. All completed work should be marked "HOT".
3.1.1.4 WELDING AND CUTTING: TANKS, VESSELS AND DRUMS
Careful tests should be made to establish that the tank, vessel or drum is free from explosive
flammable vapors or substances. The responsible supervisor should make a check before permitting
any work to begin. It is essential that past contents of the tank, vessel or drum be identified. If there is
any doubt or if the tank is known to have had any kind of flammable or explosive content, it should be
cleaned and purged thoroughly prior to welding or cutting. Extreme care should be taken in
considering methods of tank welding and cutting as these jobs are hazardous operations unless
correct safety measures are taken. Welding and cutting on drums is strictly controlled and, in most
cases, prohibited.
Note: The use of oxygen for blowing out containers and small tanks is forbidden.
3.1.1.5 CONFINED SPACES
It is vital that forced ventilation be maintained in confined spaces at all times. Airline respirators may
be needed for men working inside such places. No gas cylinders should ever be allowed into such an
area. The hoses and equipment used inside must be in excellent condition.
Where work in confined spaces has to take place over several days, the hoses and equipment shall
be taken outside overnight in case of any leakage that could occur, resulting in a build up of gas
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
3.1.1.6 PERSONNEL PROTECTION
Helmets, welding hoods, and goggles are necessary to protect eyes and face against heat and the
effect of the intense light emitted by welding operations.
Goggles are required to protect the eyes of the welder from pieces of flying slag chips during electric
arc welding. They should be fitted with opaque side pieces. Welding hoods have to fit double glass
shield within dark one on the top swinging type..
Electric welding operations must be effectively screened to prevent nearby personnel from being
affected by harmful radiation. Screens should be made from fire resistant materials or should be
suitably treated with a fire resistant compound. Screens should be designed and placed so as not to
restrict the flow of air for ventilation purposes.
Gloves are necessary protection to the hands against heat, sparks, molten metal, and radiation.
Leather, suitably reinforced at points of maximum wear, is the material most generally worn. Gloves
should be long enough to protect wrists and forearms. When gloves are not long enough, protective
sleeves of similar materials should be worn.
Safety boots and leggings are essential to provide effective protection against heat, flying sparks, and
falling metal. Pant cuffs shall never be worn inside of the safety boot.
3.1.1.7 HEALTH HAZARDS
Apart from the obvious hazards of physical burns, health hazards in welding operations fall into two
classes: hazards from radiant energy and hazards from dusts and fumes.
3.1.1.7.1 Radiant Energy
The process of welding produces radiant energy in the form of visible light, ultraviolet rays, and
infrared rays. The risk of this energy harming the operator or other personnel can. be minimized by
the proper use of protective clothing and shielding. Exposure '.of the skin to infrared and ultraviolet
rays can result in irritation and burning. The risk of exposure is lessened by wearing protective
clothing, shielding, and distance.
Arc-eye or flash burn is a well known condition in welding operations and is due to the eyes being
exposed to ultraviolet rays. This condition is a superficial bum on the outer layer of the eye.
The effects normally wear off within two days, and generally no permanent damage is caused. The
condition is, however, extremely painful and can easily be avoided by the use of eye protective lens or
shields.
Welding protective lens shall be tempered glass. Lens shall be distinctively marked to identify
approved lens shade.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
Lens Shade Guide:
1. Arc Welding- 10 to 14
2. Torch Brazing- 3 to 6
3. Gas Welding- 4 to 8
3.1.1.7.2 Respiratory Effects
The risk of being gassed in normal welding operations is slight; however, when working in confined
areas, a forced ventilation system should be in operation to remove any build up of hazardous gases.
Oxy-acetylene welding operations can cause the oxygen and nitrogen of the air to unite to form
nitrogen oxides. In well ventilated areas this does not cause any problems; however, in confined
areas or where the welder is working very close to the job, the amount of nitrogen oxides breathed
can rapidly reach toxic levels. The main problem with this gas is that the welder does not appear to
be affected at the time; the real effects take place some 6 to 24 hours after exposure.
All welding operations produce quantities of ozone, a highly toxic gas. In oxy-acetylene and electric
arc welding, the amount produced is small and providing adequate ventilation is used, the risk is
negligible. Significant and sometimes dangerous amounts of ozone can be formed when inert gas
shielded welding is being carried out.
There are many other dangers which can arise when welding or cutting under specific conditions or
on particular metals. Hazardous operations include: welding on manganese steel, galvanized
material, material which has been degreased or on material which has been painted with lead, copper-
bearing, or chromate-containing paint. These problems must be recognized before the job starts, and
safe practices for dealing with them must be established.
Although welding cannot be regarded in general as an extremely hazardous occupation, exposure to

concentrated fumes may be irritating and in some cases dangerous. It is essential that each
operation be analyzed before work starts and that the control measures are correctly applied.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
3.1.2 RIGHT OF WAY

Timber clearing and felling should be done under the direction of an experienced and competent
person.
Dozer must be equipped with roll bar or protective cover constructed of material sufficiently strog to
protect the operator.
Operator must make certain that all person are in the clear area.
Dozer operator must not allow anyone to ride on the dozer blade, blade room or draw bar.
Operator or others should never attempt to make any repairs or adjustment or to grease the machine
without first switch off the engine.
At all power line crossing, the "Danger Power Line" signs shall be installed immediately after clearing
has been completed. These signs shall be placed approximately 30 meters on each side of the
power line and in a position where the sign will be seen by all vehicles travelling the right of way.
3.1.3 DITCHING
All underground cables, conduit, oil and gas lines and other pipelines must be properly located and
uncovered carefully before ditching operations are started.
The operator is held responsible for maintaining his machine and equipment in safe and satisfactory
operating conditions.
No employee other than the operator should be in the cab while machine is in operation.
Do not stay with the machine near the edge of the ditch.
Normally do not descent into the ditch, but when you must, make sure that the sides of the ditch are
stable and use the proper ladders.
All slopes shall be excavated to at least the angle of repose except for areas where solid rock allows
for line drilling or pre-splitting.
The angle of repose shall be reduced when an excavations has water conditions, silty materials,
loose boulders, and in those areas where erosion, deep frost action, and slide planes appear.
3.1.4 STRINGING AND BENDING

Stay away from tractor during loading and moving of pipes.
Always make sure of the stability of the pipe after it is lowered.
Check and verify periodically the equipment used for the pipe movement.
All sideboom hooks must be equipped with a safety catch or lock to prevent cable slipping out.
Carry out the transfer of the pipes as close to the ground as possible.
Lay down the pipes correctly to prevent the possibility of moving or rolling.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
Suitable signs or flags must be placed on access road at points where trucks are turning off to string
pipe.
The bending machine operator shall be held responsible for making a daily inspection of the machine
and any defects discovered shall be corrected immediately and reported to the supervisor.
Swamper or helper shall not ride pipe being moved to and from bending machine.
3.1.5 CLEANING, COATING AND WRAPPING

Employees handling or working around hot dope or primer shall wear top shoes or boots with trouser
legs on the outside and have full length sleeves extending over the top of gloves.
Buckets shall never be filled over two thirds capacity to prevent hot dope splashing over the edge of
the bucket. Defective buckets shall not be used.
Burners on dope kettles shall be cleaned and inspected at regular intervals to keep them in good
condition, and kettle firemen shall be cautioned about "flashbacks".
Dope kettles shall be equipped with down spouts, and cut-off valves shall be of the quick-closing
type.
Employees shall not place their body over the outrigger pole in balancing the cleaning or wrapping
machine, due to the possibility of a "kick". The pole shall be grasped in the hands.
3.1.6 LOWERING
Lowering shall be directed by the foreman in charge. Signals and other orders to the tractor
operators must come from the foreman alone.
No employees should be in the ditch, or on the pipe, or between the pipe and ditch along the entire
length of the continuos section of the line while pipe is in process of being lowered.
All belt slings and wire rope connections shall be checked before each lowering operation, and belt
slings and boom lines should be hooked to the boom while the tractor is moving.
Bell holes shall be of adequate size and properly sloped to enable the welders to work without danger
of cave-ins.
Adequate preparations shall be taken to prevent sideboom tractor from falling into ditch while
lowering pipe.
3.1.7 CROSSING AND TIE-IN

Barricades, warning signals etc. must be erected on each side of the crossing before excavation is
started.
Temporary bridges with guard rails on each side must be constructed over excavations crossing
roads and must be of sufficient size and strength to support maximum loads.
Warnings signs and flashlights should not be removed while road crossings are repaired and
levelled.
Before starting any type of welding operations verify the stability of the ditch.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
3.1.8 BACKFILLING AND CLEAN-UP

The machine operator shall be careful to keep his machine on the right-of-way and not damage
crops or other property beyond the boundaries of the designated right-of-way.
The cleanup gang shall be careful to see that all dynamite wrappers, chunks of dope, welding rod
stubs and miscellaneous metal and glass are removed so that animals will not be injured by eating
or walking on same.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
4. PART 4 - MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS
4.1 CRANES AND LIFTING EQUIPMENT
4.1.1 COMPETENT PERSON
A competent person is a person who, by possession of a recognized pertinent degree or certificate of

professional standing, or who by extensive knowledge, training and experience has successfully
demonstrated the ability to solve or resolve problems relating to safe crane operations and
procedures (e.g. Rigger Technician, Crane and Rigging Specialist, etc.). A competent person shall
supervise all lifts.
4.1.2 CRANE OPERATIONS (GENERAL REQUIREMENTS)
Before beginning any crane operation, the supervisor and operator should complete the pre-operation
checklist. A lift plan required as a part of this procedure must provide the following information:
1. Crane radius
2. Boom length
3. Safe working limits of the crane (load chart)
4. Weight of the load
5. Ground and site conditions
6. Placement of the crane
7. Swing and tail clearances
8. Necessary communication to be used
9. Explanation of hand signals
10. Rigging hardware
11. Rigging sketch for critical or hazardous lifts
12. Rated capacity of rigging components
13. Sling angles
14. Strain calculations
15. Wind velocity
16. Load moment indicator
17. Other
One competent person shall be placed in charge of the lift with the responsibility of explaining in
detail, the duties of all involved in the lift before the actual lift commences. The outriggers must be
fully extended prior to the lift, and the rubber tires must be off the ground
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
4.1.3 CRANE OPERATOR QUALIFICATIONS
A valid heavy equipment license is required for all mobile crane operators.
4.1.4 SPECIAL CRANE OPERATING PROCEDURES
Heavy lifts, critical lifts, and crane personnel work platform operations require special procedures.
4.1.5 EFFECT OF WIND SPEEDS ON CRANE OPERATIONS
When wind velocities are above 32 km/h (20 mph), the rated load and boom lengths shall be reduced
according to manufacturer specifications. Wind forces are greater at height by as much as 35% or
more. All lifts above ground level, must account for wind force, i.e., side loads, down drafts, etc. as
applied to the load and boom.
4.1.6 OVERHEAD POWER LINES
There is an area surrounding every power line that is referred to as the absolute limit of approach. It
is strictly forbidden to move any crane boom or load line or load into this area unless the line has
been de-energized or insulated. There are no exceptions. The absolute limit of approach varies
according to the following table:
Line Voltage Absolute Limit of Approch

Up to 250,000 volts 20 feet (6 meters)
Over 250,000 25 feet (7.5 meters)
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
4.1.7 PRE-LIFT OPERATION CHECKLIST
 OPERATOR:
 CURRENT CRANE OPERATORS'LICENSE
 OUTRIGGERS:
 FULLY EXTENDED
 LEVEL GROUND
 COMPACT SOIL
 HEAVY PAD SUPPORTS
 LOCKING PINS/LOCKS SET
 NO HYDRAULIC LEAKS
 NO DAMAGE
 GOOD CONDITION
 WHEELS OFF THE GROUND
 OPERATION:
 CLEAR 360° VISIBILITY

 NO SHADES/CURTA-INS IN CAB
 LOAD CHARTS IN CAB
 CLEAR VISIBILITY
 WIND, ABOVE 20 m/h (32 km/h), NO GO
 DO NOT OPERATE DURING STORMS AND AT NIGHT
 LIGHTNING, NO GO
 BARRICADE CRANE CAB SWING AREA
 TAG LINES IN USE
 CLEAR OVERHEAD POWER LINES
 CLEAR AREA OF PERSONNEL 1-1/2 x BOOM LENGTHS
 NO LIFTS OVER WORKERS OR CRITICAL PROPERTY
 TRIAL LIFT, FLOAT LOAD ONE METER OFF GROUND TO CHECK
 BALANCE
 CLEAR VIEW OF SIGNAL MAN (RIGGER)
 DO NOT PULL LOADS WITH CRANE
 LOAD RADIUS INDICATOR
 MAN LIFT WORK PERMIT
 ANTI-TWO BLOCK OPERATIONAL
 LMI (LOAD MOMENT INDICATOR) OPERATIONAL
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
 RIGGING:
 CHECK ALL RIGGING FOR DAMAGE

 CHECK SLING LOAD CAPACITY
 CHECK BLOCK, HOOKS, etc. FOR DAMAGE
 HOOK SAFETY LATCH IN PLACE
 RECORD WEIGHT OF LOAD
 RECORD WEIGHT OF CRANE GEAR, ADD CRANE GEAR WEIGHT TO
 TOTAL WEIGHT
 LIFT PLAN APPROVED
 USE LOAD WEIGHT MEASURING DEVICE FOR UNKNOWN LOADS
 TRAVELING:
 BLOCKSECURED
 TIRES PROPERLY INFLATED AND IN GOOD CONDITION
 BRAKE LIGHTS, SIGNALS, MIRRORS, HORN OPERATIONAL
 ROUTE PLAN CHECKED FOR FIRM GROUND, OVERHEAD AND SIDE
 RESTRICTIONS
 ESCORT VEIRCLES REQUIRED WITH FLASHING BEACON LIGHTS
 SPEED TO BE MAINTAINED FOR SAFE LIMITS (SLOW AS POSSIBLE)
 PARKING:
 BOOM AND HOOK BLOCK(S) LOWERED TO TRAVEL POSITION

 APPLY SWING BRAKE AND POSITIVE SWING LOCK
 TIE DOWN HOOK BLOCK(S)
 RETRACT STABILIZERS
 RETRACT OUTRIGGERS
 EXTEND STABILIZERS AND LATCH ONTO FLOAT PADS
 WEIGHT OF CHASSIS OFF THE TIRES
 LET ENGINE IDLE 3-5 MINUTES
 REMOVE ALL FOREIGN MATERIAL FROM CAB(S) CLOSE ALL DOORS,
WINDOWS, SKYLIGHTS AND COMPARTMENTS
 TURN OFF SWITCHES
 STOP ENGINE
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
4.1.8 LIFT PLAN FOR CRANES
1. Operator certified Yes  No  2. Description of load

3.
 Type of crane to be used Stowe Erected (lbs/kgs)
d
 Boom lenght (total) ft/m Jib  
 Jib lenght ft/m Extension  
Hookblock (Main)
Aux. Boom Head

Headache Ball

Slings, Shackles, etc
Others :
Total (Gross Load Weight)
4.
 Weight of load lbs/kgs Effective weight of jib lbs/kgs
(see jib chart)
 Weight of headache ball lbs/kgs Weight of load block lbs/kgs
 Weight of hoist rope below boom tip lbs/kgs Weight of spreader bar
lbs/kgs
 Weight of other rigging lbs/kgs
Total load weight lbs/kgs

5.
Hoisting clearance ft/m
6.
Lift quadrant zone
7.
Operating radious ft/m
8.
Crane capacity at operating radius
9.
Crane capacity for jib configuration
10.
Ground and site conditions
11.
Wind speed (maximum 20 mph) mph
12.
Work permit required
13 Load moment indicator
Type
14. Sketch and supplementary information for crane lift is required to be attached to this plan
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
(Note: The sketch of the crane should include the following rigging information: size of each
component. safe working load (SWL) capacity; length of slings; type of component, component
diameter; weight of component and sling angles).
Supervisor: Date:
Operator: Date:
Approved: Date:
Footnote: Thisform is to befilled outfor thefollowing lifts: 1. At all construction sites and operating
plants; 2. Associated with offshore and marine sites and operations; 3. Within safety zones ofpower
lines; 4. Involving personnel platforms.
Wind Speed (Miles Per Hour) vs. Force Of Wind In Pounds Per Square Foot
MILES PER HOUR FORCE PER SQUARE FOOT, POUNDS

1 .004
2 .014
3 .036
4 .064
5 .1
10 .4
15 .9
20 1.6
WIND SPEED DEFINITION
The following table lists speed, in the major units, relative to Beaufortwind Scale Numbers, the
internationally accepted reference for wind force:
Beaufort Description Knots M/sec Km/H Miles/H

Numbers
0 Calm 0 -1 0 - 0.51 0 - 1.84 0 - 1.15
1 Light Air 1 -3 0.51 - 1.53 1.84 - 5.552 1.15 - 3.45
2 Light Breeze 4 -6 2.04 - 3-07 7.36 - 11.04 4.6 - 6.9
3 Gentle Breeze 7 -10 3.58 - 5.11 12.88 - 18.4 8.05 - 11.5
4 Moderate Breeze 11 -16 5.62 - 8.18 20.24 - 29.44 12.65 - 18.4
5 Fresh Breeze 17 - 21 8.69 - 10.73 31.28 - 38.64 19.55 - 24.15
6 Strong Breeze 22 - 27 11.24 - 13.80 40.48 - 49.68 25.3 - 31-05
7 Near Gale 28 - 33 14.31 - 16.87 51.52 - 60.72 32.2 - 37.95
8 Gale 34 - 40 17.38 - 20.44 62.56 - 73.6 39.1 - 46
9 Strong Gale 41 - 47 20.96 - 24.02 75.44 - 86.48 47.15 - 54.05
10 Storm 48 - 55 24.53 - 28.11 88.32 - 101.2 55.2 - 63.25
11 Violent Storm 56 - 63 28.62 - 32.20 103.04 - 115.92 64.4 - 72.45
12 Hurricane 64 + 32.71 + 117.76 + 73.6
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
4.2 SLINGS AND LIFTING GEAR (RIGGING)
4.2.1 SAFE WORKING LOAD (SWL)
Slings and other rigging equipment must be constructed according to a recognized standard.
The safe working load of rigging equipment is the maximum load which the equipment should be
subjected to; this load should never be exceeded.
Before use, all new equipment should be subjected to a proof load test by the manufacturer and
certified. The safe working load and serial number shall be clearly marked on the sling and the lifting
gear, either by tagging, stamping, engraving, or embossing. Riggers shall not use lifting gear unless
the safe working load is clearly visible.
Slings shall not be tagged with a safe working load in the field. Approval by the Inspection Department
and subsequent review by the Loss Prevention Department is required.
4.2.2 CHAIN SLINGS
4.2.2.1 GRADES
Only alloy steel chain shall be used. Each grade of chain should be clearly tagged by the
manufacturer, and riggers should be trained to look for the safe working load marked on each sling.
They shall be forbidden to use any equipment unless the safe working load is clearly visible.
All attached fittings (hooks, rings, etc.,) shall be as prescribed by the manufacturer. Hooks, shackles,
and eyebolts shall be equal to or exceed the safe working load of the chain.
4.2.2.2 REPAIRS
Modern chains are produced under closely controlled factory conditions using proper heat treatment
and testing procedures. On-site welding repairs cannot provide the necessary controlled conditions
to safely repair a damaged chain. Damaged chains must be returned to the manufacturer for repair
or destroyed. In particular, watch for bent links, cracked welds, and excessive wear.
Logger chains or chains used to secure truck loads shall not be used for rigging.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
4.2.3 WIRE ROPE SLINGS
2.3.1 Wire rope is the most common type of sling in use on construction sites. It is essential that
each wire rope sling is properly constructed and used. All wire rope slings shall be manufactured,
inspected, and load tested by a recognized manufacturer
4.2.3.1 DAMAGED SLINGS SHALL BE DESTROYED IF THERE ARE:
 10 random broken wires in one lay.

 4 broken wires in one strand of a rope lay.
 One broken wire at the fitting.
 Severe localized abrasion or scraping.
 Kinking, crushing, birdcaging, or any other damage causing distortion.
 Evidence of heat damage.
 End attachments are cracked, deformed, or excessively worn.
 Bent or opened hooks.
 Severe corrosion.
Each sling shall bear a permanent manufacturer's identification stating the safe working load (SWL)
in tons and serial number. Proof load test and documentation of testing is required from the
manufacturer
Wire rope clips (bulldog clips or crosby clips) shall not be used to make slings.
4.2.3.2WIRE ROPE SLING INSPECTION LOG
Location:
Project Title: _
Sling# Diameter Length SWL Date-In Service Date-Out-Service Inspector Signature

(date)
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
4.2.4 SYNTHETIC WEBBING SLINGS
These are manufactured from woven man-made fiber. Their strength lies in the width of their bearing
surface. These slings must not be subjected to point loading, sharp edged objects, and non-vertical
lifting. Synthetic web slings shall be marked with a stitched in label to show:
(a) Name or trademark of manufacturer

(b) Rated capacity for each type of hitch
(c) Type of material
4.2.4.1 REMOVAL FROM SERVICE
Slings which have been damaged or are defective in any way shall be immediately removed from
service, cut up and destroyed.
4.2.4.2 REPAIRED SLINGS
The use of repaired slings is prohibited.
4.2.5 SYNTHETIC AND NATURAL FIBER ROPE SLINGS
Each synthetic and natural fiber rope sling shall be permanently marked to
show:
 Name or trademark of manufacturer

 Manufacturer's code or stock number
 Rated loads for the types of hitches used
 Type of natural or synthetic material
 Date of manufacture
All associated rigging hardware shall equal or exceed the safe working load rating of the rope sling.
Slings shall be removed from service and destroyed when:
The fibers are cut, badly abraded or seriously worn.

There is considerable filament or fiber breakage (a light fuzzing is acceptable) on the surface.
There are particles of broken filament or fibers inside the rope between strands.
There is other damage visible such as: melting or charring, kinks or hackles, knots, damaged fittings.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
4.2.6 CARE OF SLINGS
The following points must be considered in the storage and handling of slings:
Slings will undergo shock loading when a load is suddenly lifted or when the hoisting is abruptly
stopped. This can be caused by the sudden application of the crane brake, the jerking of the load by
poor operation, or the sling slipping on the load. A shock load can increase the normal working load
by as much as five times its value.
As the angle between the legs of a multiple sling increases, the safe working load decreases. The
included angle should be no more than 90° and must never exceed 120° under any circumstances.
Before storage, chain and wire rope slings should be cleaned, lightly lubricated, and inspected. Slings
must be stored in a location where they are not liable to suffer mechanical damage, away from
extremes of heat, cold, and especially dampness.
A job site log of slings shall be maintained containing the following information: ID. number; date in
service; safe working load as stated in proof load certificate; full details of periodic inspections.
All rigging shall be inspected at least every six months and a Sling Inspection Report shall be
completed and filed for review.
4.2.7 HOOKS
Hooks should be fitted with a safety catch on the hook opening, or should be moused with wire and a
shackle used or the hook should be designed so that the slings cannot be displaced.
Loads should be applied on the hook only in the part designed to take them (i.e. the bend [bowl of the
hook). Point loading can result in over stressing the hook causing it to open or break. Therefore, point
loading shall not be permitted.
Hooks should be regularly inspected for signs of damage.
The hook shall be removed from service for the following reasons:
1. If there are visible cracks

2. If it is twisted 10° out of place
3. If there is a 15% throat opening beyond the manufacturer's specification
A thorough examination shall be carried out each year.
4.2.8 SPREADER BARS
Spreader bars shall be permanently identified with the safe working load, manufacturer's name and
serial number.
Spreader bars shall be stored away from moisture, and protected from physical damage
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
4.2.9 EYEBOLTS AND SAFETY HOIST RINGS
Sometimes machinery or other equipment is delivered to the site with eyebolts attached as lifting
points. For such situations, the design and function of each of the three basic types of eyebolts
should be known.
Standard eyebolts are the weakest and are dependable only for vertical lifts.
Shouldered eyebolts can be used at slight angles, but are unsafe at less than 45 degrees with the
horizontal.
Safety hoist rings (swivel eyes) are bolted in place with a calibrated torque wrench and maintain
maximum capacity at all angles.
4.2.10 SHACKLES
Shackles (clevis) are used for making connections in rigging. They should be tested by the
manufacturer and marked with the safe working load.
The pins are separate but matched parts of the shackles, so care must be taken to use the correct
pin for each shackle. Rebar, mild steel bolts or similar items are not acceptable replacements for
shackle pins.
4.2.11 RIGGER
The job of rigger requires thorough training. The man assigned must be well-acquainted with the
capabilities of the crane being used, hand signals, the different functions of lifting gear, and the
various methods of loading.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
4.3 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
The widespread use of mechanical equipment in the construction industry improves the quality and
efficiency of the work but it can lead to situations which are potentially hazardous.
This section cannot cover all the situations which could arise, but it outlines some of the hazards
likely to be encountered from specific items of equipment and their use.
The only safe way of using mechanical equipment is to have properly trained operators, running
equipment that is well maintained and carrying out the work for which it was designed.
4.3.1 OPERATORS
4.3.1.1 QUALIFICATIONS
Only trained personnel shall operate any mechanical equipment. Operators shall be trained in the
procedures and functions relevant to a specific piece of equipment; they must be fully aware of the
capabilities and limitations of the machine and have a knowledge of the day-to-day maintenance that
it requires.
It is recommended that contractors train and test all equipment operators and issue them with written
authorization specifying the equipment which they are competent to operate.
4.3.2 MACHINERY GUARDS
All moving parts of machinery must be shielded by guards. This is particularly true with gears,
pulleys, V-belt drives, fans, and revolving shafts. All of these are present on most of the static
equipment used on or around construction sites. Other examples of equipment which must be
guarded include cooling fans on compressors and generators, the main drive shafts on pumps and
dumpers, and the cable drum on winches and concrete mixers.
Guards must be installed on equipment before it arrives on site and maintained in position at all times
while the equipment is operating. Guards removed for routine maintenance or for repair must be
replaced before the equipment is returned to service.
4.3.2.1 MULTI-PIECE TYRE RIMS AND LOCKING RINGS
As safety equipment like tyre cages, restraining bars, racks and clips during tire checkout cannot fully
protect employees working on or near the tyre repair area, always deflate the tyre first before making
repairs. Inflate tyres inside a strong restraining device (tyre cage) by increasing the tyre pressure very
slowly.
4.3.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Before any mechanical equipment is used in a restricted area, all required work permits must be
obtained
All machinery should be inspected before being placed in service and at regular intervals thereafter.
Maintenance schedules should be established for each piece of equipment and strictly followed.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
No repair, adjustment, or replacement of parts on moving machinery is permitted. Before making any
repairs, all equipment must be stopped and deactivated so that it cannot be unintentionally started.
At the start of each shift, the operator must check oil, water, fuel, and hydraulic levels, that all gauges
are operating and that the machine is functioning smoothly. Safety equipment (e.g., guards, limit
switches, governors) must be checked daily.
Equipment traveling or working on the highway must have lights and reflectors. Park equipment clear
of the roadway. If this is not possible, use flashing lights, cones, or other warning devices to alert
approaching traffic.
When vehicles are left unattended (even overnight), engines must be stopped, parking brakes applied
and the wheels chocked. Blades, scraper bowls, and other hydraulic equipment must be lowered to
the ground before the operator leaves the machine. The ignition key should be removed and/or
battery cables disconnected to avoid start-up by unauthorized personnel.
Unless otherwise instructed, operators must dismount from machines while maintenance or repair
work is being carried out.
Cabs fitted to equipment must give 360° visibility. Cabs must be kept clean and clear of such items
as rubbish and loose tools. Windows must be kept clean at all times and should be replaced if the
glass becomes pitted, cracked or broken.
Where the operator of a mobile machine cannot see the area all around his machine, an attendant
must be in a position to direct and assist the operator.
All equipment must be located so that exhaust fumes will not affect workers in the area. Gasoline-
driven equipment shall not be used inside a building or other confined space.
4.3.4 COMPRESSORS
Compressors are one of the most common pieces of equipment used in construction work. They
can be used to supply air for portable power tools or to supply air to sustain men working with
breathing apparatus in extremely hazardous atmospheres. There is a considerable difference in the
quality of the air used for these two functions.
All employees on site must know the dangers of compressed air. Never use compressed air to dust
off clothing or machinery. Horseplay with compressed air must be strictly forbidden. When
compressed air is used in special cleaning/purging tasks, goggles and full face shield must be worn.
Compressors must be properly designed, inspected, tested and maintained. Relief valves shall be
installed, and the air receiver must be periodically inspected.
Before start up, a daily check should be made of the compressor's pressure relief valve, fuel, oil and
water levels and the air reservoir should be drained of trapped water. The operating manual for the
particular type of compressor used should be strictly followed.
4.3.5 CONCRETE MIXERS AND BATCHING PLANTS
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
A concrete mixer of some type will be used on almost every construction site. The principles of good
maintenance and properly trained operators apply equally whether it is only a small mixer for
masonry work or a full batching plant with a large capacity cement silo, sand and aggregate bins, and
a power shovel.
All chains, gears, and revolving shafts must be guarded.
Safety chains and catches must be operative, and the lifting mechanism must be in good order.
Men must not be allowed to work under or near the loading skip unless it is held in position by a
safety chain or catch or positively blocked.
The mixer drum and the area around the machine must be thoroughly cleaned at the end of each
day's operation.
Cement bags must not be allowed to accumulate in the mixer area; they should be collected and
disposed of at regular intervals during the day.
A hooped access ladder must be firmly attached to silos for access to the top manhole. Men must
not be allowed to work inside the silo unless they are wearing a safety belt with a lifeline and an
attendant is posted outside ready to assist in case of emergency.
The approach to the sand and aggregate bins should be barricaded, and the barricades should only
be removed to allow access for vehicles delivering material.
Personal protective equipment such as respirators, ear muffs, and goggles shall be worn. Loose
fitting clothes shall not be worn around moving machinery.
Lockout and tag system is required in batching plants to ensure the safety of repair and/or
maintenance personnel. This is a means to disable process/mechanical electrical 'control'
equipment during repairs and maintenance. Lockout and tag system rules must be posted in a
conspicuous location throughout the plant and workers must be thoroughly trained in the lockout/tag
procedures.
4.3.6 DUMPERS AND DUMP TRUCKS
Dumpers and dump trucks, commonly used for construction work, often travel on the public highway.
Therefore it is essential that they be properly maintained.
The latch on dumper skips must be in good working order, and the release mechanism should
function smoothly.
Dumpers are not designed to carry passengers. It must be strictly forbidden for employees to ride in
the skip or on the engine cover
When repairs or maintenance are being carried out on a hydraulically operated dump truck, the dump
body should be fully lowered. If it is necessary to have it in the raised position, it must be blocked. Do
not rely on the hydraulic ram to support the raised body for an extended period.
All vehicles with cabs shall be equipped with windshields and powered wipers. Cracked or broken
windshields or windows shall be replaced. All cab glass shall be safety glass or equivalent.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
4.3.7 EXCAVATORS
Excavations are carried out using very specialized equipment which roughly falls into two categories:
1) fixed position machines, and 2) moving machines.
The choice of equipment to be used is determined by the size of the project, topography, volume of
earth to be hauled out and many other factors. Fixed position machines include, but are not limited to,
face shovels, backhoes, draglines and grabs. The "fixed" excavator loosens the soil and loads from a
stationary position. They are useful to perform specific excavation tasks at a single location. Their
loss of mobility is compensated by the fact that greater force can be applied at the excavation face.
"Moving" machines include, but are not limited to, bulldozers, loaders, scrapers, graders and
trenching machines. They remove, transport and deposit excavated material all in one cycle of
operation. They are used in applications where large volumes of earth need to be moved over uneven
ground. In this process, they also help to level the ground over which they operate.
The excavation work permit may require that underground pipelines or cables be located by manual
digging
Operators of excavators must possess a valid license for the machine.
Outriggers must be fully extended when operating a mechanical excavator so fitted.
An attendant must be appointed and be available at all times during excavation to assist and guide
the operator.
Excavators with a swinging motion must have a clearance of at least 0.6 meter (2 feet) from any
fixed object.
Booms on excavators must be latched before travel.
Do not excavate closer than 10 feet to the nearest pipeline or other equipment in place.
4.3.8 FORK LIFT TRUCKS
Fork lift trucks are designed to operate on firm, level ground. This type of equipment has a limited use
in construction operations. They are, however, sometimes used in materials handling yards and for
placing loads where there are firm ground conditions.
It is essential that drivers be fully trained and experienced. They must be able to manipulate loads
smoothly and efficiently.
A specific course of instruction should be established for fork lift drivers. They should not be allowed
to use the vehicles on site until they have taken the course.
Special equipment fitted to the truck, in addition to or in place of the forks, must be designed for the
specific machine.
The truck shall be equipped with overhead protection.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
When traveling with a load on the forks, the forks should be as low as possible to maintain stability.
If the load being carried obstructs the operator's forward view, he should travel in reverse.
Operators, loaders, helpers and other workers should never place any part of their bodies between
the mast uprights, cross members, or other moving parts of the fork lift truck. Stay well within limits
of the truck body or cab.
4.3.9 GENERATORS
A competent electrician shall be available to ensure that electrical connections are properly made.
The operator should be responsible only for the mechanical function of the machine.
All pulleys, belts, and fans must be totally enclosed or otherwise guarded.
The side panels to the engine cover are designed to give access to the machinery for maintenance
or repair. They must be closed at all times when the engine is running.
The machine must be properly grounded before each use.
4.3.9.1 FIRE PREVENTION GUIDE FOR PORTABLE GENERATORS
The following is a typical check list of the major items to look for. There may be other potential fire
hazards not listed, therefore a thorough inspection must be made.
 Repair all fuel leaks.

 Check hose and pipe connections for wear and cracks.
 Clean up all combustible trash around the generator.
 Clean up all fuel spills and place clean sand around area when required.
 Sheds constructed of combustible materials placed around generators and wooden
base frames are prohibited.
 Exhaust piping system shall be kept away from work areas and combustible materials.
 Generator sets shall be located at least 50 feet from buildings or materials that may
catch fire.
 Inspect all wiring for damage or improper splices/repairs.
 Electrically ground all generator sets (system and frame ground).
 Fire extinguishers must be readily accessible. One C02 extinguisher for the generator
and a dry chemical extinguisher for the engine drive is recommended.
 Conduct daily inspections of all generator sets using this guide.
4.3.10 GRADERS, DOZERS, SCRAPERS, LOADERS AND MINILOADERS
Heavy earth moving equipment only allows the operator a limited view of the immediate area. It is,
therefore, essential that a banksman be appointed to warn the operator of hazards that cannot be
seen from the operator's position.
This equipment shall be equipped with rollover protection.
Before moving his machine, the driver must walk around it to see that the area is clear.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
Men must not be allowed to sit or lie in the area around the machine.
The engine shall not be left running when the driver is not at the controls. Before leaving his machine,
a driver must shut off the engine and remove the ignition key.
Blades, scraper bowls, etc. must be lowered to the ground before the driver leaves his unit. The
wheels should be properly chocked.
If there is work to be done underneath such hydraulic equipment, the equipment must be blocked in
position.
4.3.11 WOODWORKING MACHINERY
Only fully trained operators may be allowed to use woodworking machinery. This machinery is
inherently dangerous since the hazardous parts, knives, blades, etc., cannot be fully enclosed. Only
that part of the blade necessary to carry out the work shall be exposed at any one time.
The area around saws, planers, and routers must be barricaded and only authorized and trained
personnel allowed within the barricaded area.
The ground around such machinery must be kept clear of off-cuts and other tripping hazards.
Machinery should be securely anchored to prevent movement during use.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
4.4 MATERIALS HANDLING
Materials handling forms a large part of construction work. How construction materials are handled
can have a considerable effect on the efficiency of production and on the safety record of the site.
Because of the temporary nature of site work and the frequent change of the work place, it is not
possible to mechanize material handling to the same extent as it would be in a more stable operation.
However, there are many areas in which labor intensive, inefficient, costly, and frequently dangerous,
manual material handling work can be replaced by the use of machines.
4.4.1 PLANNING
Successful mechanization of material handling requires that the correct machines be available and
properly used. The storage and movement of the various materials must be carefully arranged to
make optimum use of the machines so that efficient service can be provided and ensure that all
vehicle, crane and heavy equipment operators hold current Certification where required.
Planning for materials handling operations begins as the schedule is being drawn. Ensure that the
layout of storage areas provides for adequate access for necessary mechanical equipment.
Selection of the storage area should be made with due consideration for drainage and protection
from rain and sandstorms.
Open storage areas should be planned to minimize the reversing and maneuvering of trucks
especially into and out of confined areas.
Access ways must be wide enough to allow for the passage of fire trucks. Fire fighting equipment
should be located throughout the area.
Cribbing timber, racks, or pallets should be used to ensure that all materials are stored off`the
ground.
Protection should be provided for materials such as cement, insulation, and other bulk material which
could be damaged by moisture.
All machinery, equipment, and valves should be maintained fully assembled and securely closed. All
machined surfaces must be covered and fully protected from exposure to the weather.
The quantity of material on site at any one time must be restricted to a minimum stock. Flammable
stores shall be kept separated. Such a policy should greatly reduce losses due to pilferage or
damage.
Once these factors have been established, the staffing of the storage areas can then be considered.
On larger projects, the movement of materials could justify the employment of a loading and
unloading gang, whereas small jobs would probably need only one man assigned to this
responsibility.
Routinely, on most sites, there should be a man appointed as a materials controller responsible for
materials from the planning stage through to the final unloading, storage, and distribution stage.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
4.4.2 MACHINE TRANSPORT
A wide variety of mechanical equipment is available for transporting and distributing materials on and
around a job site. They range from simple equipment such as a dumper or a tractor and trailer to
more sophisticated equipment such as a concrete pump or a large crane
4.4.2.1 DUMPERS
Dumpers are one of the most commonly used pieces of construction equipment and have proved
very useful in transporting concrete and other small loads around site. Unfortunately they are also a
common source of injuries and damage.
Dumper drivers must be properly trained and experienced and must hold a current license. The
equipment is designed for the movement of material only. Passengers must not be allowed to travel
in the skip or anywhere else on the machine. Dumpers must be regularly maintained with particular
attention to brakes, steering, and skip release mechanism. If they are to be used for towing, a proper
towing eye with a shackle or pin must be provided.
4.4.2.2 TRACTORS AND TRAILERS
Tractors and trailers are useful for moving larger loads around the site. In addition to the normal
precaution of good maintenance, it is essential that safety chains or wire ropes be fitted between the
tractor and trailer so that if the towing connection should break or become separated for some
reason, the trailer can still be brought to a controlled stop by the tractor. Trailer and its load shall not
exceed the towing capacity of the tractor and shall be fitted with an independent braking system if it is
designed to carry more than 9,072 kilograms (20,000 pounds). Trailers used for carrying pipes
should be fitted with side stops, and loads must be securely tied down before being transported.
4.4.2.3 CONVEYOR BELTS AND MONORAILS
Conveyor belts and monorails are occasionally used for transporting concrete, sand, or aggregate on
site. They require a complete maintenance program. Because of the many problems associated with
them, thorough consideration must be given to their use. All pulleys, rollers, gears and pinch points
shall be guarded. On/off switches shall be clearly marked and readily accessible.
4.4.2.4 CONCRETE PUMPS
Concrete pumps are used for the placement of concrete in difficult situations. They have the
advantage of being able to move large amounts of concrete very speedily to the area where it is
required. The operation of this equipment demands specialized knowledge of concrete technology;
however, placing concrete by this method can significantly reduce the number of dumpers employed
or the crane usage time expended on a civil engineering contract.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
4.4.3 SITE STORES
For small or valuable materials which cannot be conveniently stored in outside areas, it is essential
that an indoor stores shed, under the control of a responsible person, be established on site.
Because of the nature of the materials stored in such an area, the main considerations must be
security and fire prevention.
The issuing and receiving of stores must be under the control of a responsible person. Adequate fire
fighting equipment must be readily available in the area. Materials should be stored on shelving or
with small items such as nuts and bolts, etc. in bins suitably marked with the contents. The safe
loads allowed on racks and the maximum stack heights should be established. All hazardous
material, such as paints, fuels, chemicals, etc., should be separated and stored in an isolated
flammable storage area. Notices warning of the dangers associated with these materials should be
posted in the hazard area.
4.4.4 MANUAL HANDLING
There are many areas of construction work where mechanization cannot take the place of sheer
muscle, and it is in such areas that the majority of injuries occur. The inevitable results of lifting
incorrectly are strained backs, slipped discs, sprains and strains, and a complexity of internal
injuries.
It is, therefore, essential that workers be trained in the correct methods of manual handling. Safe
lifting can only be carried out by the proper use of the right muscles. Back and abdominal muscles
are weak, while the leg and thigh muscles are strong. The spine has a natural and comfortable shape
when a man is standing upright, however, if he bends, the spine arches and becomes weaker. If the
spine can be kept in a straight position when lifting, the strain of the lift goes to the strong muscles of
the leg and thigh and loads can be lifted safely, with much less physical effort. This is the basic
principle of manual handling.
There are four significant points in a proper lift:
1 Grip: A good grip makes maximum use of the palm of the hand, the ball of the thumb, and
base of the fingers.
2 Back: The back must be kept straight to maintain its most natural and strongest position. This
means that the knees and ankles must be bent and the chin kept well into the chest. The body
must be positioned as close to the load as possible so as to act as a counterweight
3 Feet: The feet should be apart the width of the hips with one foot slightly in front of the other so
that a natural lead off is obtained.
4 Arms: The arms must be kept as close as possible to the body.
The important factor in manual handling is that a man should know his capabilities and ask for
assistance with loads beyond his capabilities. In dual lifting, partners should be approximately the
same height and weight so that the load does not become unevenly distributed.
Loads, even when properly lifted, can slip. The man lifting must be prepared for such a possibility and
wear the proper protective equipment. Safety footwear is mandatory to protect feet and gloves should
be worn to protect hands from laceration or splinters and to give some protection if the fingers are
trapped between the load and the other surfaces.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
5. PART 5 - ELECTRICAL AND RADIATION
5.1 ELECTRICITY
The human senses (smell, taste, hearing, etc.) do not provide a warning of an electrical hazard. The
great majority of electrical accidents result in burns. Fire and explosion from sparks in flammable
atmospheres can and does lead to loss of life and serious damage to property. All electrical
installations, no matter what voltages are used, should always be treated with great caution.
5.1.1 VOLTAGE
The severity of electric shock is not entirely dependent upon the voltage of the power source. The
ratio of the voltage to resistance determines the current that will flow through the body and the
resulting injury.
In terms of a formula this ratio is:
Current through the body = Voltage applied across the body

Resistance of the body + contact resistance
The hazard is greater if working conditions are wet or if the worker perspires freely. This produces a
combination of wet skin and body salt which provides low resistance to current flow.
5.1.2 TEMPORARY INSTALLATIONS
Distribution of electricity on a construction site is different from a permanent installation. As

construction work proceeds, the type of equipment in use changes. From excavation to completion,
there is a constant need for convenient means of connecting equipment. This requires a variety of
voltages, phases, and current in different places at different times. Load requirements will vary
considerably.
The relevant Supervisor is responsible for the temporary electric supply system on a construction
site and the safety measures associated with it.
Cables on site are subject to rough treatment. Special care should be taken to ensure that the
grounding conductor remains intact. If the conducting wire breaks, the supply will not be interrupted
under a ground fault condition and the system will no longer be safe. Damaged or spliced cords are
not acceptable.
Special care shall be taken to ensure that the correct fuse or breaker ratings are strictly enforced and
that the Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupters (GFCls) are installed properly on all circuits.
All installation work must be carried out by qualified, experienced electricians.
A competent person must be made directly responsible for the overall safety of the installation. Its
general usage, its maintenance, and any alterations and extension to the system should be under his
control. He must be at the site whenever work is being done. Before any part of a newly installed
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
electrical system or its equipment is energized, it must be thoroughly tested. Safety can be ensured
by regular inspection and maintenance.
5.1.3 HAND TOOLS AND LIGHTING
Many injuries, fires, and explosions have resulted when extension lights with defective cords or
fittings have been used or when bulbs have been broken, exposing the live filament wire to an
explosive atmosphere. All electrically operated tools shall be rated and used at a voltage not
exceeding 125V. However portable power tools must be in accordance to the Local Rules and
Regulations.
Defective extension lights and electric hand tools shall be repaired or replaced. A defective electrical
tool or cord can cause burns, falls as a result of sudden shocks, or even fatalities.
Portable electric tools, extension lights and cords should be inspected each time they are issued and
returned. This should be part of a tool store procedure. Frequent random checks should be made
where those tools, lights and plugs are being used on site.
Portable hand lamps shall comply with the following:
5.1.3.1 Metal shell, paper-lined lamp holders shall not be used.

5.1.3.2 Hand lamps shall be equipped with insulated handle.
5.1.3.3 Substantial lamp guard shall be attached to the handle or holder. Metallic lamp guards
shall be grounded. Three-wire power cords with grounding conductor shall be used.
Failure of electrical equipment, because of misuse, is a frequent cause of shock. Workers are prone
to abuse extension cords by pulling them over sharp metal objects, hanging them across equipment,
kicking them, or letting them be run over by industrial equipment. They often strain the cords during
use, causing the plug and fixture to part and expose live wires.
Many accidents occur when lower volt equipment is plugged into higher volt systems. Before any
portable tool or extension light is plugged in, the voltage required for the tool or light must be the same
as the power source, and the plugs must be checked for damage.
The importance of grounding all portable tools and lights cannot be emphasized too strongly. All non-
current carrying metal parts of any electrical equipment must be properly grounded. This will reduce
the electrical shock hazard.
In hazardous areas, more stringent rules apply as to the type of equipment which may be used.
Explosion proof light fittings for extension lights is one example.
5.1.3.1 GENERAL PRECAUTIONS:
Only qualified electricians should make repairs and carry out maintenance checks. All extension
lights must be fitted with protective guards, so if accidentally dropped, the lamp remains intact. Up to
a 120 volt maximum rated AC portable lighting system may be used for illuminating inside confined
spaces and vessels, provided it is protected by an externally located ground fault circuit interrupter.
Ground fault circuit interrupters shall be used on all electrical circuits including portable power
electrical supplies.
5.1.4 WORK ON LIVE EQUIPMENT
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
Whenever workmen are required to work on energized equipment, the job must be planned
thoroughly and the workmen should proceed with caution.
Before any work on live equipment starts, there must be a thorough knowledge of the work involved,
personal protective equipment must be available, and all necessary work permits must be obtained.
Employees must never work alone on live equipment. In addition to the man doing the job, there must
be another electrician standing by. A foreman or supervisor should also be in attendance while this
work is being carried out, and he must know how to isolate the equipment.
Before starting a job, the exact voltages should be known. This is important as it determines the type
of personal protection required for the work and the procedures established in the work permit. If
there is any doubt about voltages, a check must be made before the work is started.
Work platforms and equipment used near energized equipment shall be properly grounded.
Work on live equipment can be as safe as work on isolated equipment if the following are observed.
1 There must be a thorough knowledge of the equipment and the job to be done.
2 If there is any doubt, the advice of the supervisor or responsible person should be
sought.
3 The work must be correctly planned before starting.
4 Protective equipment must be used correctly
5.1.5 OVERHEAD AND UNDERGROUND CABLES
On any construction site, power supplies may have already been installed below ground or
overhead.
If re-routing existing cables is necessary, this should be done before the main contract starts.
5.1.5.1 OVERHEAD LINES
High voltage or overhead lines are usually uninsulated. Therefore, any kind of metallic object coming
near or in contact with them can cause a hazardous situation. High voltage can easily arc across a
considerable distance.
Arrangements should be made for Power Lines to be:
1 Re-routed clear of all construction work or placed underground if possible.

2 Made "dead", grounded.
3 Protected by barriers and timber or wire "goal-posts", so that no part of any mobile
crane, earth moving equipment, etc. can approach the live cable. Access below the
powerlines shall be restricted by barriers to where the "goal posts" are located.
The need for caution in working with overhead lines cannot be over-emphasized. High voltage
overhead lines have been mistaken for telephone cables.
It should never be assumed that there is enough clearance; it should always be proved. It should
never be assumed that a cable or line is "dead"; it should always be checked.
Spacing Between Powerlines and Pipelines
Special precautions are required during installation, operation or maintenance of above grade or
below grade onshore pipelines.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
5.1.5.2 UNDERGROUND CABLES
Normal depth of underground cables varies between 46 centimeters (18 inches) and 0.9 meter (3
feet). (Changes in ground level, due to the work, can mean that the "as built depth is no longer
correct). No mechanical excavations should be started before test trenches have been dug by hand
and cable locations established. Unless cables have been laid very deep, heavy vehicles should not
be allowed to pass over them.
Underground cables, exposed during excavation work should be assumed to be energized and not
repositioned or moved until certified to be de-energized. Exposed buried cables in open trenches
should be properly supported and the area barricaded.
Accidental damage to any cable exposed during excavation shall be immediately reported. The area
must be barricaded until the damaged cable has been made safe.
5.1.6 OVERHEAD POWER TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION
The standards given in this section provide minimum requirements for safety and health during
construction.
5.1.6.1 INITIAL INSPECTIONS, TESTS, OR DETERMINATIONS
Existing conditions shall be determined before starting work, by an Inspection or a test. Such
conditions shall include, but not be limited to, energized lines and equipment, condition of poles, and
the location of circuits and equipment, including power and communication lines.
Electrical equipment and lines shall be considered energized until determined to be deenergized by
testing and grounding.
Operating voltage of equipment and lines shall be determined before working on or near energized
parts.
5.1.6.2 DE-ENERGIZING LINES AND EQUIPMENT
All circuits will be identified, tagged, locked, and tested. Equipment shall be checked for potential and
protective grounds shall be applied. Guards or barriers shall be erected as necessary near to
adjacent energized lines.
5.1.6.3 EMERGENCY PROCEDURES AND FIRST AID
Employees working with electricity should be knowledgeable and proficient in the following:
1 Procedures involving emergency situations;

2 First-aid fundamentals including cardiopulmonary resuscitation; and
3 Remote field crews shall have an employee certified in First-Aid.
5.1.6.4 NIGHT WORK
When working at night, spotlights or portable lights for emergency lighting shall be provided as
needed to perform the work safely.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
5.1.6.5WORK NEAR/OVER WATER
When crews are engaged in work over or near water and when danger of drowning exists, suitable
protection such as buoyant work vests shall be worn. Life rings, ropes and at least one skiff shall be
provided.
5.1.6.6 HYDRAULIC FLUIDS
All hydraulic fluids used for the insulated sections of derrick trucks, aerial lifts, and hydraulic tools
which are used on or around energized lines and equipment shall be of the insulating type.
5.1.6.7 LIVE-LINE TOOLS (HOT STICKS)
Only live-line tool poles having a manufacturer's certification meeting the following requirements shall
be used:
1 100,000 volts per foot of length for 5 minutes when the tool Is made of fiberglass, or
2 75,000 volts per foot of length for 3 minutes when the tool is made of wood
All live-line tools shall be visually inspected and wiped clean before use each day. Tools with any
hazardous defect shall be removed from service.
5.1.6.8 MATERIAL HANDLING
5.1.6.8.1 Unloading
Prior to unloading steel, poles, cross arms, and similar material, the load shall be thoroughly
examined to ascertain if the load has shifted, binders or stakes have broken, or the load is otherwise
hazardous to employees.
5.1.6.8.2 Pole Hauling
During pole hauling operations, all loads shall be secured to prevent displacement and a red flag shall
be displayed at the trailing end of the longest pole.
Precautions shall be exercised to prevent blocking of roadways or endangering other traffic.
When hauling poles during the hours of darkness, illuminated warning devices shall be attached to
the trailing end of the longest pole and haul truck brake lights shall not be obscured.
5.1.6.8.3 Storage
No materials or equipment shall be stored under energized bus, energized lines, or near energized
equipment.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
5.1.6.8.4 Framing
During framing operations, employees shall not work under a pole or a structure suspended by a
crane, A-frame, or similar equipment unless the pole or structure is adequately supported.
5.1.6.8.5 Attaching the Load
The hoist rope shall not be wrapped around the load. This provision shall not apply to electric
construction crews when setting or removing poles.
Non-conductive tag lines or other suitable devices shall be used to control loads being handled by
hoisting equipment.
5.1.6.9 GROUNDING FOR PROTECTION OF WORKERS
1.6.9.1 Isolation and Voltage Testing
Equipment to be worked on when it is deenergized shall be isolated from the system and tested for
voltage using test equipment rated for the system, and be grounded.
5.1.6.9.1 Applying and Removing Grounds
Grounding cables shall be connected to ground first, and then the equipment. Grounding cables shall
be installed and removed using hot sticks or insulating gloves and protective apparel.
Grounding cables shall first be disconnected from the line or equipment and then be disconnected
from ground.
Grounding cables shall be at, or as close as practicable to, the work location.
Protective grounds shall be installed so that it is not possible for workers to come in contact with a
grounded component and an ungrounded component simultaneously.
5.1.6.9.2 Grounding Distance
If the work is to be performed at more than one location in a line section, the line section must be
grounded and short circuited at each end of the line section and the conductor to be worked on shall
be grounded at each work location.
5.1.6.9.3 Removal of Grounds for Testing Purposes
Grounds may be temporarily removed with the permission of the Supervisor. Extreme caution shall
be exercised while the equipment/line is not grounded.
5.1.6.9.4 Grounding Electrode
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
When grounding electrodes are utilized, such electrodes shall exhibit low resistance to ground;
thereby, rapidly diminishing the electrical hazard to personnel. Other-wise, insulated tools (or other
operating equipment) must be used by personnel.
5.1.6.9.5 Grounding Cables And Clamps
Grounding cables and clamps shall be capable of conducting the anticipated fault current and shall
have a minimum size of No. 2 AWG standard copper.
5.1.6.10 OVERHEAD LINES
Prior to climbing poles, ladders, scaffolds, or other elevated structures, an inspection shall be made
to determine that the structures are capable of sustaining the additional or unbalanced stresses to
which they will be subjected.
Where poles or structures may be unsafe for climbing, they shall not be climbed until made safe by
guying, bracing, or other adequate means.
Before installing or removing wire or cable, strains to which poles and structures will be subjected
shall be considered and necessary action taken to prevent failure of supporting structures.
When setting, moving, or removing poles using cranes, derricks, gin poles, Aframes, or other
mechanized equipment near energized lines or equipment, precautions shall be taken to avoid
contact with energized lines or equipment.
Unless using protective equipment suitable for the voltage involved, employees standing on the
ground shall avoid contacting equipment or machinery working adjacent to energized lines or
equipment.
Lifting equipment shall be bonded to an effective ground or it shall be considered energized and
barricaded when utilized near energized equipment or lines.
Pole holes shall not be left unattended or unguarded. Even in desert areas, unguarded pole holes are
a hazard.
Tag lines shall be of a non-conductive type when used near energized lines.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
5.1.6.10.1 Metal Tower Construction
When working in unstable material, the excavation for pad or pile-type footings in excess of 1.52
meters (5 feet) deep shall be either sloped to the angle of repose as required or shored if entry is
required. Ladders shall be provided for access to pad or pile-type footing excavations in excess of 1.2
meters (4 feet).
When working in unstable material, provision shall be made for cleaning out auger-type footings
without requiring an employee to enter the footing unless shoring is used to protect the employee.
A designated employee shall be used in directing mobile equipment adjacent to footing excavations.
No one shall be permitted to remain in the footing while equipment is being spotted for placement.
Where necessary to assure the stability of mobile equipment, the location of use for such equipment
shall be graded and leveled.
Tower assembly shall be carried out with a minimum exposure of employees to falling objects when
working at two or more levels on a tower.
Guy lines shall be used as necessary to maintain sections or parts of sections in position and to
reduce the possibility of tipping.
Members and sections being assembled shall be adequately supported.
No one shall be permitted under a tower which is in the process of erection or assembly, except as
may be required to guide and secure the section being set.
When erecting towers using hoisting equipment adjacent to energized transmission lines, the lines
shall be de-energized when practical. If the lines are not de-energized, extraordinary caution shall be
exercised to maintain the minimum clearance distances required.
Erection shall be set on firm level foundations and when the cranes are so equipped, outriggers shall
be used.
Tag lines shall be utilized to maintain control of tower sections being raised and positioned, except
where the use of such lines would create a greater hazard.
The loadline shall not be detached from a tower section until the section is adequately secured.
Except during emergency restoration procedures, erection shall be discontinued in the event of high
wind or other adverse weather conditions which would make the work hazardous.
Equipment and rigging shall be regularly inspected and maintained in safe operating condition.
Adequate traffic control shall be maintained when crossing highways and railways with equipment.
An employee shall be utilized to determine that required clearance is maintained in moving equipment
under or near energized lines.
5.1.6.10.2 Stringing/Removing De-energized Conductors
When stringing or removing de-energized conductors, the provisions of the following paragraphs
shall be complied with.
Prior to stringing operations, a briefing shall be held setting forth the plan of operation and specifying
the type of equipment to be used, grounding devices and procedures to be followed, crossover
methods to be employed, and the clearance authorization required.
Where there is a possibility of the conductor accidentally contacting an energized circuit or receiving
a dangerous induced voltage buildup, to further protect the employee from the hazards of the
conductor, the conductor being installed or removed shall be grounded.
When the existing line has been de-energized, proper clearance authorization shall be secured and
the line grounded on both sides of the crossover, or the line being strung or removed shall be worked
on as if energized.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
When crossing over energized conductors in excess of 600 volts, rope nets or guard structures shall
be installed unless provision is made to isolate or insulate the workman or the energized conductor.
Where practical the automatic re-closing feature of the circuit interrupting device shall be made
inoperative. In addition, the line being strung shall be grounded on either side of the crossover and
worked on as if energized.
Conductors being strung in or removed shall be kept under positive control by the use of adequate
tension reels, guard structures, tielines, or other means to prevent accidental contact with energized
circuits.
Guard structure members shall be sound and of adequate dimension and strength, and adequately
supported.
Anchors, riggings, and hoists shall be of ample capacity to prevent loss of the lines.
The manufacturer's load rating shall not be exceeded for stringing lines, pulling lines, sock
connections, and all load-bearing hardware and accessories.
Pulling lines and accessories shall be inspected regularly and replaced or repaired when damaged or
when dependability is doubtful.
Conductor grips shall not be used on wire rope unless designed for this application.
While the conductor or pulling line is being pulled (in motion) employees shall not be permitted
directly under overhead operations, nor shall any employee be permitted on the crossarm.
A transmission clipping crew shall have a minimum of two structures clipped in between the crew
and the conductor being sagged. When working on bare conductors, clipping and tying crews shall
work between grounds at all times. The grounds shall remain intact until the conductors are clipped
in, except on dead end structures.
Except during emergency restoration procedures, work from structures shall be discontinued when
adverse weather (such as high wind or ice on structures) makes the work hazardous.
Stringing and clipping operations shall be discontinued during electrical storms.
Reel handling equipment, including pulling and braking machines, shall have ample capacity, operate
smoothly, and be leveled and aligned in accordance with the manufacturer's operating instructions.
Reliable communications between the reel tender and pulling rig operator shall
be provided.
Each pull shall be snubbed or dead ended at both ends before subsequent pulls.
5.1.6.10.3 Stringing Adjacent to Energized Lines
Prior to stringing parallel to an existing energized transmission line, it shall be determined whether
dangerous induced voltage buildups will occur in the system, particularly during switching and ground
fault conditions.
When stringing adjacent to energized lines, the tension stringing method or other methods which
preclude unintentional contact between the lines being pulled and any employee shall be used.
All pulling and tensioning equipment shall be isolated, insulated, or effectively grounded.
A ground shall be installed between the tensioning reel setup and the first structure in order to ground
each bare conductor, sub-conductor, and overhead ground conductor during stringing operations.
During stringing operations, each bare conductor, sub-conductor, and overhead ground conductor
shall be grounded at the first tower adjacent to both the tensioning and pulling setup and in
increments so that no point is more than 3.218 kilometers (two miles) from a ground.
 The grounds shall be left in place until conductor installation is completed.

 Such grounds shall be removed at the last phase of aerial cleanup.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
 Except for moving type grounds, the grounds shall be placed and removed with a hot
stick.
 Conductors, sub-conductors, and overhead ground conductors shall be grounded at all
dead-end or catch-off points.
A ground shall be located at each side and within 3.2 meters (10 feet) of working areas where
conductors, or overhead ground conductors are being spliced at ground level. The two ends to be
spliced shall be bonded to each other- It is recommended that splicing be carried out on either an
insulated platform or on a conductive metallic grounding mat bonded to both grounds.
When a grounding mat is used, it is recommended that the grounding mat be roped off and an
insulated walkway provided for access to the mat.
All conductors, sub-conductors, and overhead ground conductors shall be bonded to the tower at any
isolated tower where it may be necessary to complete work on the transmission line.
 Work on dead-end towers shall require grounding on all de-energized lines.

 Grounds may be removed as soon as the work is completed, provided that the line is
not left open circuited at the isolated tower at which work is being completed.
When performing work from the structures, clipping crews and all others working on conductors, sub-
conductors, or overhead ground conductors shall be protected by individual grounds installed at
every work location.
5.1.6.11 UNDERGROUND LINES
Warning signs shall be promptly placed when covers of manholes, hand holes, or vaults are
removed.
Before an employee enters a street opening, such as a manhole or an unvented vault, it shall be
promptly protected with a barrier, temporary cover, or other suitable guard.
 No entry shall be permitted unless forced ventilation is provided or the atmosphere is

found to be safe by testing for oxygen deficiency and the presence of explosive gases or
fumes.
 Where unsafe conditions are detected, by testing or other means, the work shall be
ventilated and otherwise made safe before entry.
 Provisions shall be made for an adequate continuous supply of air.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
5.1.6.11.1 Work in Manholes
While work is being performed in manholes, an employee shall be available in the immediate vicinity
to render emergency assistance as required. This shall not preclude the employee in the immediate
vicinity from occasionally entering a manhole to provide assistance, other than for emergencies. This
requirement does not preclude a qualified employee, working alone, from entering for brief periods of
time, a manhole where energized cables or equipment are in service, for the purpose of inspection,
housekeeping, taking readings, or similar work if such work can be performed safely. However,
someone on the surface must be aware of this type of entry and know the expected duration of the
task.
Before entering or using open flames in a manhole excavation in an area where combustible gases
or liquids may be present, such as near a gasoline service station, GOSP, refinery, etc., the
atmosphere of the manhole or excavation shall be tested and found safe or cleared of the
combustible gases or liquids.
5.1.6.11.2 Trenching and Excavating
During excavation or trenching, in order to prevent the exposure of employees to the hazards created
by damage to dangerous underground facilities, efforts shall be made to determine the location of
such facilities.
When underground facilities are exposed (electric, gas, water, telephone, etc.) they shall be
protected as necessary to avoid damage.
When multiple cables exist in an excavation, the cable to be worked on shall be identified by electrical
means unless its identity is obvious by reason of distinctive appearance.
Before cutting into a cable or opening a splice, the cable shall be identified and verified.
When working on buried cable or on cable in manholes, metallic sheath continuity shall be
maintained by bonding across the opening or by equivalent means.
5.1.6.12 CONSTRUCTION IN ENERGIZED SUBSTATIONS
When construction work is performed in an energized substation, authorization shall be obtained.

When work is to be done in an energized substation, safety precautions shall be detailed.
Extreme caution shall be exercised in the handling of busbars, tower steel, materials, and equipment
in the vicinity of energized facilities.
5.1.6.12.1 Barricades and Barriers
Barricades or barriers shall be installed to prevent accidental contact with energized lines or
equipment.
Signs indicating the hazard shall be posted near the barricade or barrier.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
5.1.6.12.2 Control Panels
Work on or adjacent to energized control panels shall be performed by designated employees.

Precaution shall be taken to prevent accidental operation of relays or other protective devices due to
jarring, vibration, or improper wiring.
5.1.6.12.3 Mechanized Equipment
Use of vehicles, gin poles, cranes, and other equipment in restricted or hazardous areas shall at all
times be controlled by designated employees.
All mobile cranes and derricks shall be effectively grounded when being moved or operated in close
proximity to energized lines or equipment, or the equipment shall be considered energized.
Fenders shall not be required for low-boys used for transporting large electrical equipment,
transformers or breakers.
5.1.6.12.4 Substation Fences
When a substation fence must be expanded or removed for construction purposes, a temporary
fence affording similar protection, when the site is unattended, shall be provided. Adequate bonding
and grounding interconnections shall be maintained between temporary fence and permanent fence.
All gates to all unattended substations shall be locked, except when work is in progress.
5.1.7 ELECTRIC SHOCK
Speed is essential in dealing with any electrical accident. Employees working with electricity should
be trained in First Aid and cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR).
In brief, the sequence for dealing with an electrical accident is:
1 If at all possible, switch off the power supply. If this is not instantly possible, release the
victim from contact with the conductor by using dry gloves, dry blanket, dry wood, dry
clothing, rubber sheets, or properly insulated equipment.
2 If breathing has stopped, begin CM and continue as necessary,
3 Call for first aid assistance, a doctor, and an ambulance
Overhead power lines are usually uninsulated and any kind of metallic object coming near or in
contact with them can cause a hazardous situation. High voltage can easily arc across considerable
distance. Overhead lines should therefore be re-routed, "made dead" or protected by timber "goal
posts" and barriers.
Note: Grounding Cables Shall Be Isolated And Removed Using Insulating Tools And
Protective Apparel
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
5.2 IONIZING RADIATION
Ionizing industrial radiation, such as x-rays generated by equipment or gamma rays emitted
spontaneously by radioactive materials, are widely used in industry for non-destructive testing, e.g.,
testing of welds in pipes and pressure vessels, without damaging the material. The material tested
does not retain any radioactivity when testing is completed.
For all practical purposes, the radiation produced by x-ray equipment or emitted by radioactive
sources are the same. X-rays and gamma rays both have properties which should be understood.
Even though they penetrate the body, they cannot be perceived by any of our five senses; they can
be absorbed and scattered by matter; they travel in straight lines at the speed of light; they ionize
gases; they affect photographic emulsions; and by far the most important, they can be harmful to the
living cells of the body.
5.2.1 METHODS OF PROTECTION AGAINST RADIATION
Distance, time, and shielding are the usual methods of reducing radiation exposure.
5.2.1.1 DISTANCE
Distance is an effective method of protection because gamma and x-rays obey the inverse square
law, that is, the radiation intensity decreases with the inverse square of the distance. Conversely,
dose rates at close distances can be extremely high, even for low activity sources. It is essential,
therefore, that unshielded sources are kept at a sufficient distance from personnel so as not to pose
a health hazard to them.
5.2.1.2 TIME
Time is a useful method of protection because high dose rates can be accepted over very short
periods of time. However, the cumulative dose must remain at acceptable limits,
5.2.1.3 SHIELDING
To lessen harmful radiation, materials of high density, such as lead, depleted uranium, or tungsten,
are used to absorb emitted radiation.
In the use of x-ray equipment, precautions against emitted radiation are necessary until the electric
power is turned off and locked out. On the other hand, radioactive materials constantly emit radiation
and cannot be switched off. Consequently, to absorb unwanted radiation and facilitate handling,
sealed sources are housed in shielded containers or bunkers.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
5.2.2 CLASSIFICATION OF PERSONNEL AND EXPOSURE LIMITS
In order to control human exposure to industrial radiation, all employees and contractors are
classified as either radiation workers or non-radiation workers according to their training and need to
use radiation sources. Classification does not guarantee safety, safety procedures and adequate
equipment must be used at all times.
5.2.2.1 RADIOGRAPHER
At the start of each shift, radiographers must ensure that all equipment is in safe working order. All
malfunctions must be reported to the super-visoror Competent Person immediately. The
radiographer must also make sure that he is wearing a valid TLD or film badge and a direct-reading
pocket dosimeter which has been charged and zeroed. One radiation monitoring instrument must be
available for each source in use. Equipment must be transported to the work site with safety locks in
place. Under no circumstance is equipment to be transported in an unassembled or open condition.
Upon arrival at the job site and prior to operating with any sealed source, the radiographer must
ensure that non-radiation workers are not subject to radiation levels that would exceed that which is
permitted. Radiation areas must contain radiation warning signs and be clearly displayed around the
circumference of the radiation area. In addition, in populated work areas, a rope or tape barrier shall
be erected around the radiation area. The area will be monitored with approved survey meter to
ensure safe area for non-radiation workers is maintained.
A weekly report on the condition of all equipment should be passed to the super-visor.
5.2.3 SHIPPING AND TRANSPORTATION
Permits are required for shipping radioactive materials into and out of countries. Transporting
radiation sources to work locations requires a locked container located out of the passenger
compartment. The vehicle shall have radiation signs on the front and rear.
5.2.4 STORAGE AREAS
Upon completion of work or at the end of each work period, every sealed source must be returned to
a storage area. Storage is usually within fenced area. Sources may not be stored in the back of a
truck whether or not they are under lock and key. Radiation readings must be taken at the perimeter
of the storage area and the radiation level must be within acceptable limits. Radiation signs must be
fixed to the barriers of all storage areas.
A log shall be maintained of radiation sources in storage, logged in or out, by source and responsible
competent person in charge of source.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
6. PART 6 - CHEMICAL AND OPERATIONS
6.1 LIQUEFIED PETROLEUM GASES
Liquefied Petroleum Gases (LPG) are now being widely used in the construction industry. The
precautions covered in this section are directed to those industrial operators who handle these
gases, i.e., stores personnel and the actual operators using the gases. LPG is a term applied to
combinations of hydrocarbons known under various trade names and also widely known as propane
and butane.
6.1.1 GENERAL
These gases are colorless, heavier than air, and normally odorless, but for commercial usage, an
odorizing agent is added for the obvious reason of facilitating detection in the event of accidental
escape of the gas.
At normal temperatures, they are gaseous and can be changed into a liquid by the application of
moderate pressure. In the liquid form, relatively large quantities of LPG can be safely transported and
stored in suitably designed containers. The approximate ratios of gas volume to liquid volume are
275:1 for propane and 240:1 for butane.
Both gases are heavier than air at normal temperatures. Any leakage will form a gas cloud which will
settle at the lowest possible level. It may ignite if a flame or sparks are present. This could happen at
some considerable distance from the source of leakage. The gases form an explosive mixture with
air, and they react vigorously with oxidizing materials. These gases can be highly dangerous; if the
container is exposed to heat or flame, there is a high risk of explosion. To reduce the risk of
explosion, the cylinders must be equipped with relief valves or fusible plugs.
6.1.2 STORAGE
Cylinders, whether empty or full, should be stored under cover for protection against the elements.
The storage place should be detached from any other buildings and constructed of non-combustible
material. It should preferably be a well-ventilated one-story building with all doors leading directly to
the outside.
LPG cylinders must be stored at least 6.1 meters (20 feet) away from oxygen or oxidizers or must be
separated from them by a fire wall rated at 30 minutes.
The building should be fenced-off and signs should be displayed: "No Smoking".
Water and dry chemical fire extinguishers shall be available.
Natural ventilation points should be positioned at both high and low levels.
All electrical fixtures should be of an explosion-proof type.
All gas valves, fittings, connections, and piping shall be made of stainless steel, brass or copper;
rubber/plastic hoses are prohibited.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
6.1.3 HANDLING OF CYLINDERS
Cylinders must not be dropped or allowed to come into violent contact with each other.
They must be stored and used in an upright position, thus preventing the liquid from passing through
the relief valve regulator and into the equipment.
They must not be placed in or near excavations or any low level area.
They must be placed on level ground and secured to prevent accidental tipping over.
Care should be taken that the valve assemblies are not damaged. The main valve should be closed
and the valve cap in position when the cylinder is not in use
Smoking is not permitted when handling cylinders.
6.1.4 LEAKAGE
Cylinders, valves, connections, hoses, and pipings should be regularly inspected for damage or
leakage. Detection can be carried out by the following methods, if flammable gas meter is
unavailable:
1 Smelling
2 Touching: Leaking cylinder may be colder than those around it.
3 Listening: Sound of escaping gas.
4 Looking: Localized condensation or frosting.
Small leaks may be confirmed by using soapy water.
A leaking cylinder must be immediately removed to an open space, clear of all buildings and people
or any potential source of ignition.
The cylinder must be placed with the leak uppermost.
The supplier must be notified immediately.
6.1.5 TRANSPORTATION
Full or empty cylinders which are loaded on vehicles must be placed in an upright position, be
adequately secured to prevent movement, and have valve caps in place.
The vehicle should have fire fighting and first aid equipment.
The vehicle must also display all the necessary warning notices.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
6.1.6 OPERATION
In permanent or semi-permanent installations, the cylinder must be placed outside the building out of
direct sunlight and the gas piped to appliances inside.
The cylinder must be secured in an upright position, away from excavation, pits, and other low lying
areas.
The regulator and other equipment is to be connected and a test made to ensure that all joints are
gas tight.
The regulator capacity must be suitable for the equipment being used.
Before lighting, a check is to be made to ensure that there is sufficient ventilation for the burner and
that all combustible materials are removed from the work area.
Once the burner has been lit, it should burn with a steady blue flame with bluegreen bake cones.
A dry chemical fire extinguisher must be readily available at the work area.
Shut off valves shall be installed at the main tank supply and at the operating source
6.1.7 ACTION IN CASE OF FIRE
When cylinders are exposed to severe fire conditions and are engulfed in flames, no attempt should
be made to extinguish the fire. In such condition, cylinders are likely to explode immediately.
The action to be taken in such an instance is to evacuate the area immediately and raise the alarm.
Cylinders which have been exposed to fire conditions must be adequately cooled with water before
any attempt is made to remove them.
If cylinders are equipped with automatic relief valves and the fire exposure is severe, ignited jets of
gas from these valves can extend as far as 6 meters (20 feet).
In the case of a small fire arising from gas leakage, it is possible to extinguish the fire by immediately
turning off the cylinder valve. The cylinder should be approached from the opposite direction to the
source of fire.
If a fire does not directly involve other cylinders in the vicinity, water hoses played on those cylinders
will prevent increased internal pressure and minimize the risk of explosion.
All cylinders which have been involved in a fire must be returned immediately to the supplier, alerting
the supplier that the cylinder was involved in a fire.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
6.1.8 BULK INSTALLATIONS
Before any bulk storage installation is undertaken, the LPG supplier should be consulted on the size
of the tank required and the most suitable fittings for that particular installation, including relief
capacity.
Temporary tanks are to be installed above ground on a dry, hard foundation away from drains,
culverts, or hollows where it would be possible for any leaking gas to collect.
Tanks should not be exposed to heat or direct rays of the sun and they must be adequately protected
against accidental or unauthorized interference.
Only trained personnel are to install bulk tanks and equipment. All items used must be of approved
design and comply with the appropriate standards.
All pipeline systems must be tested to a safe working pressure after completion of the assembly.
Fire water protection shall be provided.
6.1.9 FIRST AID
If LPG has been inhaled, the affected person must be removed from the area, kept warm and rested,
and not allowed to move about. If the affected person is not breathing, mouth-tomouth resuscitation
should be applied. No attempt should be made to give an unconscious person anything to drink. If the
person is breathing, oxygen must be administered by a competent person. If liquid has gone to the
eyes, they must be thoroughly washed out with water.
Medical aid must be obtained as soon as possible.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
6.2 CHEMICALS
There are thousands of chemicals in existence and hundreds of new ones are being developed for
commercial use every year. While almost all of these chemicals are beneficial in some way, they can
be dangerous too. In fact, of the thousands of chemicals in existence, it is difficult to find any that are
absolutely harmless.
When dealing with an unfamiliar chemical, it is always wise to assume that it is hazardous. The
exposure to hazards associated with a material depends largely on its proper identification, handling,
usage, transport, storage and disposal. In addition, materials which may be completely harmless in
one application may be deadly in another.
There are too many chemicals and too many possible combinations to deal with them individually
here. In the references listed, there are many sources of information on the identification, storage,
transportation, use, and disposal of hundreds of chemicals. In the literature there are tables of
hazardous chemical reactions. If the name of the chemical is known, the names of others with which
it is likely to react dangerously can be found. The proper identification and labeling of chemicals is a
very important safety precaution.
When dealing with a potentially harmful chemical, precautions should be taken to ensure that
employees do not swallow it, inhale it, or allow it to contact their skin. The chemical must not be'
allowed to accidentally mix with other substances in transportation, storage, or use. It must not be
subjected to undue shock, pressure, or heat. When the chemical is no longer needed, it must be
safely disposed of or recycled.
6.2.1 HEALTH HAZARDS
Hazards to health arise from inhaling, swallowing, or skin contact. The severity of the hazard ranges
from nuisance chemicals that produce no injury, to chemicals that on short exposure can cause
severe injury or death. For industrial workers, the most prominent means of entry of a hazardous
chemical into the human body is through the respiratory tract by inhalation. The next most important
means of entry is through skin absorption. The least hazardous pathway is through swallowing the
chemical, as this seldom occurs in industry.
6.2.1.1 INHALATION PATHWAY HAZARD
Chemicals may be in the form of gases, vapors, dusts, or a mixture of these. The senses of sight or
smell cannot be depended upon to warn of chemical hazards. Some gases are harmful in
concentrations which cannot be detected by their odor. Furthermore, some gases paralyze the
sense of smell. Hydrogen sulfide, at low concentrations, can very quickly paralyze the olfactory
nerves so that harmful concentrations cannot be detected through smell. Ordinary automotive
gasoline, to some extent, does the same thing.
When handling a volatile liquid, the maximum allowable concentration (MAC) of the vapor should be
known and not exceeded. Where exhaust ventilation is not available, good mechanical ventilation
must be provided or the work must be done outdoors.
In the case of a chemical spill, it may not be possible to control the maximum allowable
concentration. Therefore it is necessary to keep the worker from breathing the vapor by limiting the
amount of vapor through careful handling or through the use of local exhaust ventilation. If the
concentration of the chemical in the air exceeds the threshold limit value (TLV) or MAC, then
respiratory protective devices are needed.
It is important that the right kind of device for the particular hazard be obtained. (See Breathing
Apparatus, Section 1.11.2.2 of this Manual.)
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
Dust is a common hazard. Whenever dusty material is handled, a respiratory hazard may exist.
Exhaust ventilation, fans, blowers, and proper handling procedures must be used to keep the dust
from entering the worker's breathing zone. If these methods fail, dust masks must be provided and
their use enforced.
Fine droplets of liquid form whenever liquids are sprayed or splashed so suitable precautions must
be taken to prevent the fine droplets of liquid from entering the worker's breathing zone. Ventilation is
also recommended. If such methods are not adequate, suitable respiratory protection must be
provided.
6.2.1.2 SKIN HAZARDS
Skin contact/exposure hazard may not be as dangerous to life as respiratory hazards, but they are
far more common. Dermatitis resulting from contact with harmful chemicals is a common work
injury. Proper handling methods are the first step in protection. The second step, in the case of
materials which act rapidly on the human body, such as corrosive chemicals (i.e. acids and
caustics) is to provide a physical barrier in the form of goggles, face shields, hoods, gloves, aprons,
suits, etc. The third step is to provide eyewash fountains and safety showers, which flush the
material from the eyes or skin.
The type of personal protective equipment required depends on the hazardous characteristics of the
chemical and the way it is used. Personal cleanliness is important. Thorough washing of the hands
and face before meals, daily bathing, and a regular change of clothing will reduce harmful contact
with chemicals.
6.2.1.3 HAZARDS OF SWALLOWING CHEMICALS
In industry, swallowing chemicals does not occur frequently. The main precaution is to ensure that
employees know that the material is hazardous If swallowed, and that they must wash their hands
free of harmful chemicals before smoking, drinking or eating. Never store harmful chemicals in food
containers or handle chemicals near food.
6.2.2 EMERGENCY TREATMENT
6.2.2.1 ARTIFICIAL RESPIRATION
Persons overcome by harmful gases and vapors must be taken out into the fresh air and, if they have
stopped breathing, given artificial respiration; if there is no heartbeat, commence cardiopulmonary
resuscitation (CPR).
6.2.2.2 FIRST AID
In case of accidental swallowing of chemicals, it is not wise to induce the patient to vomit. In the case
of caustics or corrosives, drinking a large amount of water, followed by medical treatment, is
recommended.
6.2.2.3 SHOWERS AND EYEWASH FOUNTAINS
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
For skin hazards, the best treatment is thorough water washing under the emergency shower or
eyewash fountain. Field treatment should only consist of flushing away the chemical. The patient
should then be taken to the hospital for treatment.
These water flushing devices are required, because working procedures and personal protective
equipment may fail. In the case of materials that are immediately harmful to the eyes or skin, safety
showers or eyewash fountains should be provided. They should be within 6 meters (20 feet) of the
exposure site and accessible in an unobstructed straight line from the work location. Emergency
showers shall be properly identified with signs and color background. A person who is blinded by a
chemical must immediately be taken to the shower or eyewash fountain. Some emergency showers
or eyewash fountains are designed so that standing under or near them activates the water supply.
Others have hinged gates which are pushed to activate the shower, but all should be easily activated.
CAUTION:
There are two important points that workers must be taught about the correct use of emergency
fountains and shower:
1 Before removing goggles, face shields, or other personal protective equipment, the user must
get under the shower or use the eyewash fountain to wash off as much of the chemical as
possible.
2 It is a mistake to start for the hospital without first doing everything possible to flush out the
harmful chemical. The eyes or skin must be washed for quite a long time to remove the
chemical. It is necessary to wash the eyes holding the eyelids open with the fingers for at
least fifteen minutes to free the eyes of bases or caustics. This will be painful, but it is
absolutely necessary. In the case of acids, water will remove the acid quickly, but it is
necessary to hold the eyelids open with the fingers, painful as this may be, and roll the eyes
around under the shower or in the eye fountain to make sure that all acid is removed.
At least fifteen minutes of thorough washing are required in the case of acid contact to skin or
eyes.
Caustic alkalis such as sodium hydroxide and potassium hydroxide are much more difficult to
wash from the skin or eyes. Strong alkalis of this type mixed with water feel slippery to the
touch. The skin should be washed until the slippery feeling has gone and washing should be
continued for at least 15 minutes.
6.2.3 FIRE HAZARDS
Only the necessary amount of hazardous materials should be brought into the work place, usually
not more than one day's supply. Hazardous materials must not be allowed to accumulate, and any
extra amounts should be cleared from the work area, Slop liquids or trash should be cleared away
immediately. All flammable materials should be stored according to the specifications of their
Chemical Hazard Bulletins, (CHBs) or Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).
Smoking and the use of sparking devices near flammable liquids or finely divided combustible solids
must be prohibited.
Blocking off air to a burning object is often possible in acid dip tanks or rubbish containers where a
cover can be provided and dropped down on the container to smother the flames.
The use of fire fighting equipment, such as fire extinguishers or water streams, must be available in
case all effective fire prevention measures fail to prevent a fire. Ordinary sand is a good extinguishing
agent for smothering small fires.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
The fire hazards of most common materials can be found in the references given in this section. The
proper fire extinguisher should be at the job site and readily available at all locations where a fire
hazard is possible.
6.2.4 REACTIVITY HAZARDS
As a general precaution, rough handling and shock should be avoided. Chemicals should not be
allowed to mix with other chemicals unless it is known that no harmful reaction will occur.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
6.2.5 TRANSPORTATION, STORAGE AND DISPOSAL
6.2.5.1 TRANSPORTATION
During transportation, hazardous materials must be protected against shock, accidental mixing with
other materials, damage to containers, undue heat from the sun or other sources, and theft, which
could allow the hazardous materials to come into contact with people who are unaware of the
dangers. A vehicle transporting hazardous chemicals must be suitably labeled.
6.2.5.2 STORAGE
Precautions must be taken to avoid shock, undue heat, or unplanned mixing. There are some cases
where separating walls or specified distances are required.
Specific storage recommendations for hazardous and manufacturer-provided Material Safety Data
Sheets (MSDS) should be followed. Incompatible chemicals should not be stored together.
A list of hazardous materials should be kept indicating type and quantity of materials used in each
case, its hazardous classification rating and the quantity disposed of
6.2.5.3 CONTAINERS
Hazardous materials must be stored in containers that are safe for the transportation and use of the
material. Containers must be labeled with the appropriate hazardous materials label to indicate the
actual contents. All safety factors must be observed when transferring material from one container to
another and the receiving container must be labeled to correctly describe the contents. Empty
containers previously used to hold hazardous material must be washed free of the material or
destroyed.
6.2.5.4 DISPOSAL
Hazardous/toxic waste is liquid, solid and semi-solid material, which, because of the quantity
involved, the concentration, and/or the biological, physical, chemical or infectious characteristics,
pose a hazard to human health and/or the environment if it is improperly managed.
The following are some examples of waste materials which are considered hazardous/toxic:
 Waste paints and related products

 Asbestos
 Resins
 Wood preservative products
 Insecticides and pesticides
 Flushing fluids / chemicals
 Compressed, gases (acetylene, oxygen, chlorine)
 Flammable / combustible liquids (gasoline, diesel oil)
 Corrosive liquids (acid)
 Cleaning fluids
 Explosives
 Flammable solids
 Poisons and infectious chemicals
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
 Radioactive materials
 Magnetized materials
 Polychlorinated Biphenyl (PCB (electrical transformer oil)
Step 1:
The hazardous material must be identified by composition or content and containers clearly marked
"Hazardous Material only, with no other conflicting or confusing words.
Step 2:
Follow manufacturers or literature safety guidelines (Material Safety Data Sheets, MSDS, Chemical
Hazard Bulletins, CHBs, etc.)
Step 3:
The hazardous waste material must be adequately sealed up in containers to prevent leakage and
labeled to denote composition or content.
6.3 COFFERDAMS
A cofferdam is an enclosure constructed to exclude water from a work area during construction.
Cofferdam construction ranges from simple dikes to complicated timber or steel structures.
Cofferdams must satisfy two basic requirements:
1. They must be strong enough to withstand the forces caused by water, soil conditions,
and floating debris.
2. They should be as watertight as practicable, although some leakage, requiring pumping,
must always be expected.
The most common type of cofferdam is constructed from steel sheet piling. The piles must be driven
to design and penetration specifications and must encounter the pre-specified driving resistance. The
steel piling is generally braced by a system of horizontal wales and struts which are designed to
resist external forces.
6.3.1 DESIGN
All cofferdams in excess of 1.2 meters (4 feet) in depth must be designed by a qualified engineer.
Any deviations from the design encountered in the actual construction of the cofferdam must have
the approval of a qualified engineer.
Any cofferdam which is to be constructed in a navigable water-way or which would constitute an

obstruction or hazard to the operation of small boats or pleasure crafts must be approved in
advance.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
6.3.3 CONSTRUCTION
All cofferdam construction work must be performed in strict compliance with the design drawings
and specifications. All work must be accomplished by qualified craftsmen in accordance with
accepted trade practices. Any unexpected soil or hydrographic conditions encountered during the
construction must be reported immediately to the design engineer for evaluation and a possible
modification of the structure.
If overtopping of the cofferdam by high waters is possible, means shall be provided for controlled
flooding of the work area.
Emergency evacuation warning signals shall be provided and procedures developed. Notices shall
be posted at the entrance to the job site, and throughout the area.
Walkways, ramps or bridges on cofferdams shall have at least two exit pointsThese shall be
provided with standard guardrails.
6.3.4 POTENTIAL HAZARDS
The construction and the use of cofferdams have three primary hazards which merit special
consideration.
6.3.4.1 STRUCTURAL COLLAPSE
Cofferdam structures may collapse as a result of the imposition of unexpected structural loads or the
failure of the soil inside the cofferdam structures as evidenced by an upward heave or "blow-out" of
the bottom. Such failures often occur with little or no warning, therefore a means of rapid exit from the
enclosed cofferdam structures must be provided for all workmen engaged in work inside the
structures.
6.3.4.2 OVERHEAD LOADS
Sump pumps, equipment, and machinery shall be mounted on a cantilevered platform outside of a
cofferdam. This will eliminate overhead obstructions, which could present a hazard to the workmen
engaged in construction within the confines of the cofferdam.
6.3.4.3 DISLODGMENT OF STRUTS AND WALLS
All internal supporting structures must be secured against accidental dislodgment. The use of locking
devices on wedges will prevent their accidental removal and the resulting collapse of the structure.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
6.3.5 INSPECTION
General inspection should be carried out daily or after any weather condition or incident which might
affect the safety of the cofferdam.
The security of all wedges should be carefully checked at the start of each shift.
Leaks can indicate a movement of the piles. Serious leaks should be reported at once to the engineer
in charge of operations.
Pump intake fastenings and the pumping sump should be carefully checked at the start of each shift.
6.3.6 LEAKS
Small leaks can be sealed by lead caulking in the clutches from the inside of the cofferdam. Minor
leaks over a large area can be sealed by dropping light granular material into the water surrounding
the cofferdam. The material will be sucked into the gap between the piles where it will form a seal.
Where large leaks are encountered which cannot be sealed as described above or there is an
indication that the piling has moved, the cofferdam area shall be immediately evacuated of all
personnel and the problem brought to the attention of the design engineer for correction.
MOD-405-02 F
DOCUMENTO LC
SAFETY OPERATIVE N.
REV. DATA FOGLIO
0
DATE
19/06/02 PAGE
2/201
7. PART 7 - BLANK FORMS
MOD-405-02 F

Safety Operative Instructions

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Safety Operative Instructions

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

DOCUMENTO LC

0 19/06/02 Issue SPP QSA PRE

1.1 BONATTI ALCOHOL AND DRUGS POLICY 13

1.2 BONATTI SAFETY POLICY 14

1.3 BONATTI SAFETY SERVICES 20

1.4 ACCIDENT INVESTIGATION, ANALYSIS AND REPORTING 21

1.5 Responsibility for Safety 26

1.6 EMERGENCY PROCEDURES 32

1.7 SAFETY TRAINING 35

1.8 SITE PLANNING AND HOUSEKEEPING 39

1.9 FIRST AID 46

1.10 PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT 48

1.11 RESPIRATORY PROTECTION 54

1.12 FIRE PREVENTION 57

1.14 WINTER WORK RULES 69

1.15 WORK PERMIT SYSTEM 72

2. PART 2 - GENERAL AND CIVIL 75

2.1 EXCAVATIONS, TRENCHING AND SHORING 75

2.3 ASBESTOS AND OTHER FIBERS 85

2.4 PILING OPERATIONS 89

2.6 WORKING PLACES, LADDERS, AND SCAFFOLDING 93

2.6.4 Requirements Common to All Scaffolding 101

2.7 HAND TOOLS AND POWER TOOLS 114

2.7.3.2 Repair and Storage 117

2.8 PAINTS AND COATINGS 128

2.9 CONCRETE, CONCRETE FORMS, AND SHORING 136

2.9.4.1 Concrete Mixers 136

3. PART 3 - MECHANICAL 141

3.1 GENERAL 141

4. PART 4 - MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS 155

4.1 CRANES AND LIFTING EQUIPMENT 155

4.2 SLINGS AND LIFTING GEAR (RIGGING) 161

4.2.3 Wire Rope Slings 162

4.3 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT 166

4.4 MATERIALS HANDLING 172

5. PART 5 - ELECTRICAL AND RADIATION 175

5.1 ELECTRICITY 175

5.1.6.5 Work Near/Over Water 179

5.2 IONIZING RADIATION 187

6. PART 6 - CHEMICAL AND OPERATIONS 189

6.1 LIQUEFIED PETROLEUM GASES 189

6.2 CHEMICALS 193

6.3 COFFERDAMS 198

6.3.4.2 Overhead Loads 199

7. PART 7 - BLANK FORMS 201

1.1 BONATTI ALCOHOL AND DRUGS POLICY

1.2 BONATTI SAFETY POLICY

Bonatti undertakes to provide its employees with:

 A safe place of work

Employees will be responsible to Bonatti for

1.2.1 SAFETY POLICY IMPLEMENTATION

1.2.1.1 COMPLIANCE WITH CONSTRUCTION AND PROJECT REQUIREMENTS

1.2.1.2 OPERATING STANDARDS AND INSTRUCTIONS

1.2.1.3 PERSONAL PROTECTION

1.2.1.5 EDUCATION AND TRAINING

1.2.1.6 MOTIVATION AND RECOGNITION

1.2.1.7 JOB PLACEMENT

1.2.1.8 RESPONSE TO ACCIDENTAL OCCURRENCES

1.2.1.9 TRAFFIC SAFETY

1.2.1.11 COMPLIANCE REVIEWS

1.2.1.12 STANDARDS AND INSTRUCTIONS

1.2.1.13 WRITTEN PROGRAM

13. Tools and portable power tools